null  null
Chrysler Powertrain Technologies
Rockwell Automation
Project Book
Control Technologies, Safety Components, Industrial Components
and Applications
Version 1.0
October 1, 2010
Chrysler Powertrain
Technologies
Rockwell Automation
Project Book
Control Technologies, Safety
Components, Industrial
Components and Applications
Version 1.4
April 04, 2014
Project Statement
The following Project Book was developed with Chrysler Powertrain Technologies (CPT) with Rockwell
Automation to provide approved system solutions for Chrysler Powertrain projects.
This components project book is based upon the specific architecture specifications requested by the Chrysler
Powertrain Technologies Group.
Document ID
Project name
Area of application
Powertrain Machining and Assembly Lines
Type of document
Project Book
Organization unit
Chrysler Powertrain
Customer plant
Chrysler Powertrain Globally
Supplier plant
Rockwell Automation
Mayfield Heights, OH, USA
File format
.DOC Microsoft Word 2003
Output format
PDF Acrobat Reader 4.0 or higher
Document Approval and Responsibility
Created or edited by:
Larry Smentowski (Rockwell Automation) USA
William Sarver (Rockwell Automation) USA
Overall approval given by:
Chrysler Powertrain Technologies
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 2 of 143
Revision History
The controlled version of this document is stored on the Rockwell Automation website:
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/sp/5058-sp122_-en-p.pdf
Any printed copy is an uncontrolled copy. The user shall verify with the web site that he/she is in fact using the
appropriate version of the specification for the specific project he/she is working on.
Any questions or comments with respect to this specification should be directed to the project engineer for the
specific project in question.
Revision Date
Version
No.
Description
Section
Affected
Revised By
01-October2010
1.0
Rockwell Automation Powertrain Component Book
L. Smentowski
01-November2011
1.1
Rockwell Automation Powertrain Component Book
Updated links and
removed obsolete
products
L. Smentowski
25-May-2012
1.2
Rockwell Automation Powertrain Component Book
Updated and added
Sections
Highlighted
L. Fischer, B. Sarver
25-July-2013
1.3
Rockwell Automation Powertrain Component Book
Updated and added
Sections
Highlighted
B. Sarver
4-April-2014
1.4
Rockwell Automation Powertrain Component Book
Updated sections
and removed
obsolete products
highlighted
B. Sarver
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 3 of 143
Table of Contents
1.1 Contacts
12
1.2 General Product Application and Safety Note
12
1.3 Safety Laws and Regulations
13
1.4 Safety Portfolio
13
2 Short Circuit Current Ratings
13
2.1 ProposalWorks Tool
14
2.1.1 Short Circuit Current Rating Tool
145
3 Safety Relays & Components
16
3.1 Safety Relays
15
3.1.1 MSR6R/T
16
3.1.2 MSR30RT/RTP
16
3.1.3 MSR121RT
17
3.1.4 MSR122 (Duplicates)
17
3.1.5 MSR125H/HP
188
3.1.6 MSR127RP/TP/RTP
18
3.1.7 MSR131RTP
199
3.1.8 MSR132E/EP
19
3.1.9 MSR138DP
19
3.1.10 MSR142RTP Multi-Output Safety Relay
20
3.1.11 MSR144RTP
20
3.1.12 Guardmaster® Safety Relays (DI,D,IS,SI,CI,EM, and EMD): 440R
3.1.13 Configurable Safety Relay: 440C-CR30 SW
201
21
3.2 Modular Configurable Safety System: MSR200
22
3.3 Modular Configurable Safety System: MSR300
22
3.4 Safety Components
233
3.4.1 Safety Cable Pull switches: 440E
233
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 4 of 143
3.4.2 MatGuard™ Safety Mats: 440F
23
3.4.3 MatGuard™ Safety Mat Controllers
24
3.4.4 Safety Gate Switches: 440G/440K
244
3.4.5 Guard Locking with solenoid: 440G-MT
24
3.4.6 Tongue Switch w/o Solenoid: 440K-MT-GD2
25
3.4.7 Guard Locking Switches: 440G-LZ
266
3.4.8 Guard Locking Switches: 440G-TLS-Z GD2
26
3.4.9 Prosafe™ Trapped Key Interlock: 440T
27
3.4.10 Non Contact Interlocks Sipha: 440N-S
288
3.4.11 SensaGuard: 440N-Z
288
3.4.12 Safety Contactors: 100S / 104S
288
3.4.13 IEC Safety Control Relays: 700S-CF
29
3.4.14 NEMA Safety Contactors:Heavy-Duty Safety Control Relay 700S-P,700S-PK
299
3.4.15 NEMA enclosed Safety Disconnects: 1494G
299
3.4.16 Safety Connection Systems: 898R, 898D
30
3.4.16.1 Quick Distribution Systems with Enunciation
30
3.4.16.2 Quick Distribution Systems without Annunciation
31
4 MachineAlert Machine Protection
32
4.1 Phase Monitors: 813S
32
4.2 Current Monitors: 809S
33
4.3 Thermistor Monitors: 817S
344
5 Signaling Devices
344
5.1 70mm Control Tower™ Stack Lights: 855T
344
5.2 50mm Control Tower™ Stack Lights: 855E
344
5.3 70mm Control Tower: 855F
355
5.4 40mm and 60mm Tower: 854J and K
35
5.5 Horns: 855H
355
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 5 of 143
5.6 Industrial Beacons: 855B
35
5.7 Panel Mount Alarms: 855P
366
5.8 22mm LED Illuminted & non-Illuminated Operators: 800F
366
6 Photoelectric Sensors
377
6.1 Series 9000
37
6.2 LaserSight – 42CM
38
6.3 RightSight - 42EF
388
6.4 MiniSight – 42KL
399
6.5 Metal Cylindrical – 42CM (18mm), 42CF (12mm)
40
6.5.1 18mm Metal Cylindrical – 42CM
40
6.5.2 12MM Metal Cylindrical – 42CF
41
6.6 Ultrasonic Sensor – 873P
41
6.7 Multi-Sight– 48-MS
42
6.8 42LMS - Laser Measurement Sensor
42
7 Encoders
43
7.1 High-Performance Industrial Incremental Encoder: 845H
43
7.2 Heavy-Duty Incremental Encoder: 845T
43
7.3 Hollow-Shaft Incremental Encoder: 844D
44
7.4 Single-Turn Absolute Encoder: 845G
44
7.5 DeviceNet™ Multi-Turn Absolute Encoder: 842D
44
8 Condition Sensing Switches and Controls
45
8.1 Solid State pressure Switch: 836E
45
8.2 Solid State Temperature Switch: 837E
46
8.3 Flow Switch: 839E
46
8.4 Speed Sensing Switches
466
8.5 Part Verification Arrays for Bin-Picking Applications: 45PVA
477
8.6 Area Array Two dimensional scanning technology: 45AST
477
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 6 of 143
9 Circuit & Load Protection
48
9.1 Motor Protection Breaker & Circuit Protectors
488
9.1.1 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker: 140-MG
488
9.1.2 Motor Protection - Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 140U-D
489
9.1.3 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers: 140-M
49
9.2 Supplementary Protection
50
9.2.1 Supplementary Protectors: 1492-SPM
50
9.3 Fuse Holders
51
9.3.1 Fuse Holders: 1492-FB
51
9.3.2 Fuse Holders: 140F
51
9.4 Industrial DIN Rail Circuit Breakers
9.4.1 UL 489 Circuit Breakers:
52
1489-A
9.4.2 Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
52
1489-M
52
9.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
53
9.5.1 Molded Case Circuit Breaker: 140G
53
9.6 Electronic Circuit Protection
54
9.6.1 Elecgtronic Circuit Protector: 1692-A
54
9.7 Residual Current Devices
55
9.7.1 Residual Current Device: 1492-RCD
55
9.8 Overload Relays
56
9.8.1 Thermal Overload Relays
56
9.8.1.1 IEC Bi-Metallic Overload Relays: 193-T1
56
9.8.1.2 IEC Miniature Bi-Metallic Overload Relays: 193-K
56
9.8.2 Electronic Overload Relays
57
9.8.2.1 Electronic Overload Relays: E300
57
9.8.2.2 Electronic Overload Relays: E1 Plus
58
10 Relays and Contactors
59
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 7 of 143
10.1 Relays
59
10.1.1 Control Relays: 700-P
59
10.1.2 Control Relays: 700-CF, 700S-CF
60
10.1.3 Solid State Miniature Square Base Relays: 700-HC
61
10.1.4 Solid State Square Base Relay: 700-HF
62
10.1.5 Solid State Square Base Relay: 700-HB
62
10.1.6 Ice-Cube Solid-State Relays: 700-SC
63
10.2 Contactors
64
10.2.1 General Contactors: 100-C, 104-C, 100-D, 104-D, 100-G
64
10.2.2 Lighting Contactor: 100L
65
10.3 Mounting System: 141A
65
11 Disconnects
66
11.1 IEC Rotary Disconnect Switches: 194R
66
11.2 Variable-Depth, Flange Mounted Disconnect Switch: 1494V
67
11.3 IEC Load Switches: 194E
68
11.4 NEMA enclosed Safety Disconnects: 1494G
68
12 Transformers
69
12.1 Control Circuit Transformers: 1497
69
12.2 Machine Tool Transformers: 1497A
69
12.3 Control Power Transformers: 1497B
69
12.4 General Purpose Transformers: 1497D
69
13 Power Supplies
70
13.1 Power Supply: 1606
70
13.2 Power Supply: 1606-XLE
71
13.3 Power Supply: 1606-XLP
71
13.4 Power Supply: 1606-XLS
72
13.5 ArmorPower Supply: 1607-XT
72
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 8 of 143
13.6 Industrial Uninterruptible Power Supply: 1609-B, 1609-D
73
13.7 Surge and Filter Protection: 4983
74
14 IEC Terminal Blocks and Fuse Blocks
74
14.1 Terminal Blocks
74
14.1.1 Screw Terminal Block Line: 1492-J
74
14.1.2 Spring-Clamp Terminal Blocks: 1492-L
74
14.2 Fuse Blocks: 1491
75
15 Power Terminal Blocks
75
15.1 Power Terminal Blocks: 1492-PD
75
15.2 Enclosed Power Distribution Terminal Blocks: 1492-PDE
75
15.3 Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks: 1492-PDL
76
16 Connection Systems
76
16.1 Mini-Style: 889N
76
16.2 Micro-Style: 889D
76
16.3 Pico-Style: 889P
76
16.4 DIN Valve Field Connectors and Cordets
77
16.5 Distribution Boxes
77
16.5.1 DC Micro Connection Type: 898D
77
16.5.2 Pico Connection Type: 898P
77
16.5.3 IDC Type: 898H
77
16.6 EtherNet/IP Media
78
16.6.1 Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset
78
16.6.2 Ethernet RJ45 cordset
78
17 Ethernet Encoders
78
18 Power Products
78
18.1 Intelligent Motor Control (Less than 600 Vac)
78
18.2 SMC Dialog Plus Smart Motor Controller: Bulletin 150
79
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 9 of 143
18.3 SMC-Flex (Less than 600 Vac)
79
18.4 SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller
79
19 Standard Drives
80
19.1 PowerFlex 40 (Component Class)
80
19.2 PowerFlex 70 (Architecture Class)
81
19.3 PowerFlex® 70 AC Drive DriveGuard™ Safety Solutions
82
19.4 PowerFlex 700 (Architecture Class)
83
19.5 PowerFlex 700S (Architecture Class)
84
19.6 PowerFlex® 750 Series (753 & 755) AC Drive (Architecture Class)
85
19.7 PowerFlex® 520 Series (523, 525, & 527) AC Drives
89
19.8 Ultra 3000 Drives
93
19.9 ArmorStart IP67 Motor Control Products
93
19.9.1 OnMachine ArmorStart IP67 Starter: 280 / 281
93
19.9.2 On Machine ArmorStart with SMC Technology: 283
93
19.9.3 OnMachine ArmorStart IP67 VFD: 284
94
19.9.4 OnMachine ArmorStartLT IP67 VFD: 290/294
94
19.10 Drive/Device Logix
95
19.11 ArmorConnect Power Media
95
20 Allen Bradley matched AC Motors
96
20.1 Servo motor: 1326AB Heavy Duty motors
96
20.2 Servo motor: MPL Low inertia motors
96
20.3 Servo motor: MPM Medium inertia motors
97
20.4 Servo motor: HPK-Series High Power Induction Servo Motors
97
20.5 Servo motor: RDD-Series Direct Drive Motors
98
20.6 Actuators
98
21 Power and Energy Management
99
21.1 Powermonitor 1000
99
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 10 of 143
21.2 Powermonitor 3000
100
21.3 PowerPad Portable Powermonitor: 1412
101
21.4 RSEnergyMetrix Software
101
21.5 Condition Monitoring Solutions
102
22 Addendum A: QUICK START MANUALS
102
22.1 Drives:
102
22.2 ArmorStart
103
22.3 Stack Light , DeviceNet, 855T
103
22.4 Terminal Blocks/Wiring and Connection Systems
103
23 Addendum B: GROUNDING PROCEDURES
103
24 Addendum C: Components List
103
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 11 of 143
Introduction and Objective
This document contains product information to be used for the selection of components for CPT
programs. This document provides a basic guide to selecting the correct type of electrical components
for the correct application. It also provides the necessary contact information to assist in application
engineering, program management review, and stocking locations for ease of purchasing.
All information contained in this document is superseded by the requirements of the CPT Global
Specification.
A current, and accurate, copy of the specification can be downloaded from the following web
address:
https://gsp.extra.chrysler.com/mfg/amedd/powertrain.htm
This project book describes all the Chrysler Powertrain Technologies approved component elements that
have been adapted to the requirements of automated production.
1.1
Contacts
The project specific coordination for commercial and technical tasks between Rockwell Automation, the
machine builder and the user is done by a named member of the Rockwell Automation team. All
necessary decisions concerning dates, functionality, product releases etc. will be coordinated by
Rockwell Automation and the machine builder.
Commercial/ Technical
1.2
Title
Larry Smentowski / Bill Sarver
Company
Rockwell Automation
Address
1441 West Long Lake Road, Suite 150
Phone
Office: 248.696.1200
Mobile: 586.291.9296 / 248-703-4583
Website
www.rockwellautomation.com
Email addresses
[email protected] /
[email protected]
Tech support
www.rockwellautomation.com/support
Tech support phone
1.440.646.3434
General Product Application and Safety Note
As part of a plant, system, or individual machine tool’s design, specific considerations must be observed
and taken by end users and machine builders alike to insure that their systems and/or machines operate
within the operating guidelines and specifications of each product manufacturer so as not to damage the
internal / external product components installed and used in these systems and machine tools and to
insure the safety of all personnel working with these tools. As such, it is suggested that each machine
tool builder obtain and understand the latest revision of the Chrysler Corporation’s Powertrain Operations
Manufacturing Engineering and General Safety Specifications prior to designing their machine tools.
Design considerations for voltage, response time, torque, temperature, operation environment, etc. are
available in the relevant product documentation from each product manufacturer and it is recommended
that each machine tool builder take the time to acquaint themselves with the relevant product
documentation and follow the guidelines outlined by each manufacturer.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 12 of 143
1.3
Safety Laws and Regulations
The Machine Tool Builder is responsible for the implementation of the safety laws in the country of
installation.
1.4
Safety Portfolio
http://www.ab.com/safety/prod_directory/
The use of these types of components is optional and it is left to the Original Equipment
Manufacturer to decide if programmable safety devices or safety networks are technically or
economically required.
If a programmable safety device is utilized, the entire safety system (logic and hardware) of the
machine must be reviewed by the manufacturer(s) of the programmable safety devices for
proper application of their product(s).
2 Short Circuit Current Ratings
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A, supplement SB for Short
Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
UL 508A & NEC 409 Resources
Information on Revised Standard
NEC 409 and UL 508A Summary
The National Electric Code requires compliance with NEC article 409 in April 2006. Some states are
currently following this code, and additional states are coming on board every month. To ensure that your
industrial control panels are in compliance, Rockwell Automation provides you education and tools
through our "UL 508A & NEC 409 Resources" website.
The New Article 409 covers "Industrial Control Panels". Industrial Control Panels are intended for general
use, in ordinary locations, at 600V or less. One critical part of the new article is that Industrial Control
Panels must be evaluated & marked for their Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). This is established by
evaluating each feeder and branch circuits' SCCR and determining the smallest kA value. This weakest
link will be the panel's kA value. In order to install a panel, the kA value must be greater than that of the
incoming source.
How to Comply
The SCCR must be established using an approved method, one which is UL 508A, supplement SB.
SCCRs must be evaluated for feeder circuits and branch circuits within the power circuit. There are three
basic steps to this:
1) Establish the short circuit current ratings of individual power circuit components as specified
in SB4.2, including all feeder and branch circuits.
2) Modify (limit) the available short circuit current within a portion of a circuit in the panel due to
the presence of current limiting components as specified in SB4.3 Current limiting
components provide an option for obtaining a higher overall panel kA rating with smaller
rated devices.
3) Determine the overall panel short circuit current rating as specified in SB4.4
More information available in publication SCCR-TD001A-EN-P. Page 7 from this publication is shown on
the next page:
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/td/sccr-td001_-en-p.pdf
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 13 of 143
2.1
ProposalWorks Tool
ProposalWorks provides access to information on a broad range of Allen-Bradley products and services.
It provides an easy to use interface to make it a snap to determine the exact catalog number for the item
you need and to access current list pricing. Once you have selected the product the software
automatically selects the appropriate informational documents, photos, etc. for that product and provides
you the ability to include them easily in a word document.
2.1.1 Short Circuit Current Rating Tool
http://raise.rockwellautomation.com/RAConfig/SCRHome.asp
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 14 of 143
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 15 of 143
3 Safety Relays & Components
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/Single-Function
Safety Relay must meet all the Powertrain Specifications: Because relay can be ordered in different
configurations – Refer to Powertrain Safety Specification, Section. Some items from the Chrysler
Powertrain Safety Specification section include:
•
“Safety relays shall contain dual channel inputs and redundant electromechanical output
relays with force-guided normally open contacts.”
•
“The use of adjustable time delay safety output contacts for safety related functions (e.g.
gate access) is prohibited.”
•
“Automatic reset of safety relays is prohibited.“
Minotaur™ Safety Relays are dual channel units. Models are available with automatic, manual or
monitored manual resets to operate at 24V DC. Number of outputs ranges from 3 to 9. Outputs with
timed delays, two-hand versions and expansion units for up to 8 additional outputs are also available.
3.1
Safety Relays
3.1.1 MSR6R/T
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/SingleFunction/MSR6R-MSR6T
The MSR6R/T has an internal switch that allows the user to select either 1 N.C. single
channel input for use with gate interlock and emergency stop buttons in lower risk applications or
2 N.C. dual channel inputs for higher risk applications. The MSR6R/T has an internal selector
switch that can accommodate automatic/manual or a monitored manual reset function. Automatic/
manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts. Monitored
manual requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch to activate the
outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the
safety function.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stop category 0
Switch selectable input, Switch selectable reset
3 N.O. safety outputs, 1 N.C. auxiliary output
45mm wide housing
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
3.1.2 MSR30RT/RTP
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/SingleFunction/MSR30RT-RTP
The Minotaur MSR30RT/RTP is a microprocessor based, monitoring safety relay, with
safety rated, solid state outputs. The versatility of the MSR30RT/RTP inputs allows it to be
connected to gate interlocks, e-stop devices and four-wire safety mats. The gate interlocks and e-stops
can be either single channel or dual channel normally-closed circuits. The reset capability of the
MSR30RT/RTP allows it to set up for manual or automatic start and restart.
The outputs include two normally-open safety rated outputs that can be connected to loads up to 2A at
24V DC. These outputs can be used to send a safety stop signal to a machine or manufacturing system.
The MSR30RT/RTP also has one solid state normally-closed auxiliary output, which must only be used
to indicate the status of the MSR30RT/ RTP.
•
•
•
Stop Category 0
2 Solid State Safety Outputs
1 Solid State Auxiliary Output
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 16 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
1 N.C., 2 N.C or Safety Mat Input
Monitored Manual or Automatic/Manual Reset
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
3.1.3 MSR121RT
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/SingleFunction/MSR121RT
The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR121RT is a safety monitoring relay that
provides three normally open safety contacts, a normally open auxiliary contact and a solid state auxiliary
output for use with interfacing to PLCs. It has a versatile input arrangement. It can be connected to a
single or dual channel safety gate or e-stop, a safety mat input or a light curtain that provides cross fault
detection. Reset and output monitoring is determined by the wiring configuration. Automatic/manual
reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of external contactors. Monitored manual
requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch.
The MSR121RT has 3 normally open safety rated outputs. The safety outputs have independent and
redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. It has one NC auxiliary output as well as a
solid state PNP auxiliary output to indicate the status of the MSR121RT to a indicator lamp or a PLC.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 Safety contacts NO, 1 Auxiliary contact NC
1 Solid state PNP auxiliary contact
Single/dual channel operation
Cross fault monitoring, Monitored or automatic
reset
E-stop, safety gate, safety mat or light curtain
applications
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
3.1.4 MSR122 (Duplicates)
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/relays-and-timers/safety-relays/msr122e-expansionrelays
The MSR122E is designed to be an expansion relay for use with the Minotaur safety
relays. The MSR122E is typically used in safety system applications where additional outputs switching
connections are needed to help shut down a manufacturing process, properly and safely. The MSR122E
can be connected as a single channel (1 N.C.) or dual channel (2 N.C.) input configuration. The outputs
include 6 normally open safety rated outputs used to shut down the manufacturing system and 1
normally closed auxiliary output to indicate the status of the MSR122E. One additional normally closed
output is available to allow the host relay to monitor the status of the MSR122E. The safety, auxiliary and
monitoring outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
•
•
•
•
Safety category according to wiring
6 Safety contacts
1 Auxiliary contact
1 Monitoring contact
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 17 of 143
3.1.5 MSR125H/HP
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/relays-and-timers/safety-relays/msr35h-hp-two-handcontrol-monitoring-relays
The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR125H/HP is a logic unit for monitoring and
interfacing two-hand control devices with a safety-related circuit. The MSR125H/HP is for use with
mechanical switches and the Rockwell Automation Bulletin 800Z Zero-Force Touch Buttons.
The MSR125H/HP has two normally open safety outputs. The safety outputs have independent and
redundant internal contacts to support the safety function.
The MSR125H/HP requires the two switches to be operated within 0.5 seconds of each other and will
only authorize the ON state while both switches are held down. If one of the switches is released, the
output goes to the OFF state and the machine cannot be restarted until both buttons are released and
then operated simultaneously.
The MSR125H/HP conforms to EN 574 Category IIIC, which gives specific requirements for two-hand
control units and logic devices.
The MSR125H has fixed terminals and the MSR125HP has removable terminals.
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Category 4 per EN 954-1
Safety category IIIC per EN 574
Two-hand control unit
Two N.O. safety outputs
Fixed or removable terminals
22.5 mm wide housing
3.1.6 MSR127RP/TP/RTP
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/SingleFunction/MSR127RP-TP-RTP
The MSR127RP/TP/RTP can be connected in three different input wiring configurations: 1
N.C., 2 N.C., or with 2 PNP connections from a light curtain. When connected in the 2 N.C.
fashion, the MSR127RTP checks for cross faults across the two inputs. When connected to light
curtains, the light curtain must perform the cross fault detection.
The MSR127RP has a monitored manual reset (no auto reset allowed by Chrysler Powertrain). Models
with automatic/manual reset can have the reset jumpered or can be converted to an unmonitored
manual reset by adding a normally open switch in the monitoring loop. Models with monitored manual
reset provide checking of the output monitoring circuit. The outputs include 3 normally open safety rated
outputs as well as 1 normally closed auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and
redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary output is a nonsafety output
intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stop category 0
3 Safety contacts
1 Auxiliary contact
Cross fault monitoring
Monitored reset (Manual reset only – Chrysler Powertrain)
Removable terminals
Light curtain, E-Stop or safety gate applications
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 18 of 143
•
•
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
3.1.7 MSR131RTP
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/SingleFunction/MSR131RTP
The MSR131RTP can be connected in four different input wiring configurations: 1 N.C., 2
N.C., 2 PNP connections from a light curtain, or a four wire safety mat. When connected in
the 2 N.C. fashion, the MSR131RTP checks for cross faults across the two inputs. When connected to
light curtains, the light curtain must perform the cross fault detection. It has output monitoring for either
automatic/manual reset (no auto reset allowed by Chrysler Powertrain) or a monitored manual reset.
When configured with automatic/manual reset (jumpers on X1-X2 and X3-X4), it can have the reset
terminals S33-S34 jumpered or can be converted to an unmonitored manual reset by adding a normally
open switch in the monitoring loop (S33-S34). When configured to monitored manual reset, the output
monitoring circuit is checked through the manual application of the reset switch. One solid state output
indicates that the inputs are closed. The second solid state output indicates that the safety outputs are
active. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety
function.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Light curtain, safety mat, E-Stop inputs
3 safety contacts, 2 aux contacts, 2 solid state outputs
Cross fault monitoring
Monitored reset (Manual reset only – Chrysler Powertrain)
Removable terminals
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
3.1.8 MSR132E/EP
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/relays-and-timers/safety-relays/msr132e-ep-expansionrelays
The Minotaur MSR132E is a monitoring safety expansion relay unit with single or dual
channel input and either immediate or timed offdelay outputs. It is designed to be operated
as an “extension” of a “master” safety relay. When wired properly, the outputs of the MSR132E will
mimic the outputs of the master relay. The outputs include 4 normally open safety rated outputs used to
shut down the manufacturing system and 2 normally closed auxiliary outputs to indicate status of the
MSR132E. One additional normally closed output is available to allow the host relay to monitor the status
of the MSR132E. The safety, auxiliary and monitoring outputs have independent and redundant internal
contacts to help ensure the safety function.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stop Category 0 or 1
4 Safety contacts N.O., 2 Auxiliary contacts N.C., 1 Monitoring contact N.C.
Single channel input
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
3.1.9 MSR138DP
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/relays-and-timers/safety-relays/single-functiondelayed/msr138dp
The MSR138DP can be connected in 4 different input wiring configurations: 1 N.C., 2
N.C., or 2 PNP connections from a light curtain. When connected in the 2 N.C. fashion, it
checks for cross faults across the 2 inputs. When connected to light curtains, the light
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 19 of 143
curtain must perform the cross fault detection. The MSR138DP has output monitoring that can
accommodate either automatic/manual reset (no auto reset allowed by Chrysler Powertrain) or a
monitored manual rest. When configured with automatic/manual reset, it can have the reset terminals
jumpered or can be converted to an unmonitored manual reset by adding a normally open switch in the
monitoring loop. When configured to monitored manual reset, it checks the output monitoring circuit
through the manual application of the reset switch.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.1.10
Stop category 0 and 1
Light curtain, E-Stop, Safety Gate inputs
2 immediate safety outputs
Delayed outputs may not be used according to Chrysler Powertrain specifications
Cross fault monitoring, Monitored reset (Manual reset only – Chrysler Powertrain)
Removable terminals
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
MSR142RTP Multi-Output Safety Relay
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/relays-and-timers/safety-relays/singlefunction/msr142rtp
The new MSR142 multi-output relay unit is the latest addition to the Guardmaster
family of safety relays. It's ideal for use with everything from safety switches to light
curtains and safety mats, featuring seven safety outputs, four auxiliary outputs and two
solid-state auxiliary outputs. With this relay, users save money and cabinet space by
adding more outputs without buying additional expansion modules. The MSR142 accepts
both solid state and electromechanical inputs, is housed in a 67.5mm-wide DIN-rail
mount housing with removable terminals, and is also equipped with automatic or
monitored manual reset capabilities.
•
•
3.1.11
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, AS4024.1, ISOTR12100,
B11.19
CE for all applicable directives, C-Tick, cULus, TÜV
MSR144RTP
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/relays-and-timers/safety-relays/singlefunction/msr144rtp
The MSR144RTP monitoring safety relay is a Category 4 device (per EN954-1)
that provides an easily expandable solution where the requirement is to switch
several safety circuits or different voltages from one E-stop. It is complemented by
two types of plug-in expansion modules.
It can be connected in four different input wiring configurations (1 NC, 2NC, 2 PNP connections from a
light curtain or a four wire safety mat) and is expanded by plugging in the connectorized ribbon cable
from the dedicated expansion modules. The modules themselves are available in two types: the
MSR230P module offers four additional (NO) safety contacts, while the MSR238DP time-delayed output
expansion module features 2 NC safety and one NC auxiliary off-delayed contacts for time delays up to
5 minutes. Both can be used with the MSR144RTP in any combination up to a maximum of five
expansion modules.
• Stop category 0 or 1 (with MSR238)
• Light curtain, safety mat, E-Stop inputs
• Cross fault monitoring, Monitored or automatic reset
• Removable terminals, Expansion for up to 5 modules
• 2 NO safety outputs, 2 NC auxiliary outputs, 2 solid state auxiliary outputs
• EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
• Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 20 of 143
•
3.1.12
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
BUL. 440R - Guardmaster® Safety Relays (DI,DIS,SI,CI,EM, and EMD)
The new generation of Guardmaster® Safety Relays addresses the broad scope
of applications in the intricate safety world with a range of devices. Designed to
meet new functional safety standards, such as EN ISO 13849-1 and EN 62061,
the new family
offers key functions to simplify installation and system complexity. A broad range
of safety devices such as safety interlock switches, emergency stop devices,
pressure sensitive safety mats, and OSSD devices such as safety light curtains are all compatible with
the same relay without any additional configuration. The functionality of two standard safety relays can
be achieved in one Dual Input (DI) device, allowing connection of two dual-channel input devices into
one safety relay. A TÜV-approved single rotary switch sets the required function of the safety relay and
eliminates the typical redundant switch setting process. Selectable functions include simple logic, reset,
timing, and diagnostics. The single-wire safety connection simplifies cascading and expanding safety
functions by linking relays with a single-wire connection. A dynamic signal from device to
device provides a linkage in accordance with SIL 3, PLe, and allowing easy addition of extra I/O,
which can be configured with simple logic combinations. Flexible AND/OR logic can be configured simply
in a single relay or through a combination of relays via single-wire connection. Expansion modules are
available with four immediate or time delayed outputs. The time delay module can be configured for on
delay, off delay, or jog.
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.1.13
Suitable for applications up to PLe, SIL 3 Per ISO13849-1
Stop Category 0
One or two dual-channel inputs
Two or three safety contacts
One auxiliary contact
Cross-fault monitoring
Rotary switch configures auto/manual or monitored manual reset
Same rotary switch configures AND/OR logic of input to device
Removable terminals
Can be used with interlocks, light curtains, safety mats, E-stops, and SensaGuard™ switches
Single-wire safety output connects to single-wire safety input relays while maintaining SIL 3, PLe
Timed ON delay, OFF delay and Jog outputs on EMD
440C-CR30 SW Configurable Safety Relay
The Guardmaster® 440C-CR30 Software Configurable Safety Relay is flexible,
cost-effective, and easy to use. This relay is ideal for applications requiring as
many as nine dual-channel safety circuits and controlling as many as five output
zones. You can configure this relay using the Connected Components
Workbench™ software.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/Guardmaster-440C-CR30
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Suitable for applications up to PLe, Cat. 4 per ISO 13849-1 and SIL CL3 per IEC 62061
Offers 22-point embedded safety I/O
Supports as many as two Micro800® Plug-in Modules
Provides embedded communication via USB programming port and non-isolated serial port for RS232 communications
Includes two single-wire safety input/output points for interlocking between Guardmaster® safety
relays
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 21 of 143
Software
Use Connected Components Workbench software with Microsoft Visual Studio® to program your
Guardmaster® 440C-CR30 Configurable Safety Relays
Products
•
Guardmaster 440C-CR30 Software Configurable Safety Relay
Certifications
•
CE marked for all applicable directives, c-UL-us, TÜV pending
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/3377539/5866177/5985760/4444281/12620950/12620952/Introduct
ion.html
3.2
MSR200 - Modular Configurable Safety System
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Safety-Relays/Modular/200Series
Bulletin 440R expandable modular safety monitoring relay use plug-and-play digital I/O expansion
modules. The MSR200 can provide up to 22 input circuits with a single relay system. The use of multiple
input modules also allows inputs from various types of safety devices (mats, light curtains, switches, etc)
to the same relay assembly.
The MSR200 family’s microprocessor-based design offers enhanced diagnostic and communication
functionality. It also allows the relay to deliver output and error status over a fieldbus network to an
operator panel or other device. The output and error status text can be customized using this free
download. Removable terminals allow easier maintenance, lowering your long-term costs.
•
•
•
3.3
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
MSR300 - Modular Configurable Safety System
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/SafetyRelays/Configurable/300-Series
The MSR300 expandable modular safety monitoring relay systems use plug-andplay digital I/O expansion modules. It offers a logic configuration with multiple inputs and
controlling multiple independent outputs. The system can control up to 3 group outputs
and perform simple function block logic configurations through rotary switch settings.
The MSR300 provides up to 20 input circuits per base module.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Category 4 per EN 954-1, EN 574 Type III C
SIL3 per IEC 61508.Stop category 0
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
Pulsed input monitoring, Solid-State input annunciation
Input and output status LEDs
EDM (one per zone)
Manual, monitored or automatic reset (one per zone)
Zone control .up to 3 independent zones
RS232 diagnostic communications
•
Removable terminals
Inputs Supported
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 22 of 143
•
•
•
3.4
E-Stops, Safety Gates, Safety Mats, Light Curtains, Two-Hand Control
3 second or infinite simultaneity
Cam switch for zone muting
Safety Components
http://www.ab.com/safety/prod_directory/index.html
Additional safety items can be selected from the Chrysler Powertrain Safety approved source
list. These types of components have been specifically tested and approved for use in Chrysler
Powertrain or their safety function.
3.4.1 Safety Cable Pull switches – 440E
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Safety/Push-Buttons
Lifeline 3 is a shorter range cable-operated emergency stop device (30m). The
Lifeline 4 cable-operated emergency stop device is an addition to the Lifeline
family of products and has been designed to cater for longer rope lengths. It
incorporates all the features of the existing Lifeline 4 but can be used on cable
spans from 75m to 125m in length. It is designed to meet the stringent
requirements of EN 418 (Safety of Machinery – Emergency Stop Equipment) and is available with 4 sets
of contacts. The Lifeline 4 rope system can be installed along or around awkward machinery and can be
actuated from any position along the cable/rope, providing a constant access emergency stop facility.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rope status indicator on switch lid, reducing installation
and re-tensioning time
4 sets of contacts providing maximum flexibility
Heavy-duty weatherproof case sealed to IP66
Designed to conform to EN 418, EN 292, EN 60947-5-1,
ISO 13850, BS 5304 and EN 60947-5-5
Switches from 75 to 125 meter span
Also available in stainless steel
3.4.2 MatGuard™ Safety Mats – 440F
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/sensors-switches/operatorsafety/matguard-safety-mats
•
•
•
•
•
EN 1760-1, EN954-1 (ISO 13849-1) category 3 and IEC/EN 60204-1,
AS 4024.5, ANSI B11.19, ANSI RIA R15.06
Multiple mat configuration shall contain no dead zones
1 million actuations by a mass of 75Kg
With force applied, output will remain in the off
state
Dual channel monitoring, detection of single fault
in control mat, controller or wiring will result in a
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 23 of 143
•
failsafe shut down of system (cut wire, short,
relay failure etc.)
Heavy Duty
o 4 wire design, No dead spots, 4500 psi
3.4.3 MatGuard™ Safety Mat Controllers
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/relays-and-timers/safety-relays/matguardcontrollers
Description:
•
The MatGuard Control Unit monitors all of the mats which are
connected together to form a safeguarded zone. The safeguarded
zone can be up to a total of 100m2 and made from any number of mats. The controller is
designed to interface with the control circuit of the machine and includes two safety
relays to ensure control redundancy.
•
The controller detects a presence on the mat, a short circuit, or an open circuit. Under
each of these conditions, the safety output relays turn off. When interfaced properly, the
machine or hazardous motion will receive a stop signal, and an auxiliary output relay
turns ON.
•
The controller comes in three different package styles, a plastic case for surface or wall
mounting, a steel case for surface or wall mounting and a 35mm DIN rail mounting style.
Each style offers many of the same basic features. Each controller accepts power
supplies of 24V AC/DC. The plastic and steel-cased styles include reset buttons
whereas reset button for the DIN rail mounted style must be supplied separately. The
steel-cased controller offers extra protection against inadvertent impacts.
Features:
•
•
•
•
Selectable voltage supply
Auto/manual reset
Four-wire system to detect opens and shorts
Third Party Approval — AMTRI
3.4.4 Safety Gate Switches - 440G/440K
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Safety-Interlock-Switches
All Gate switches are to be ordered by “bundle”. The Cable will be ordered at the same
time. Please contact Rockwell Automation for assistance.
3.4.5 Guard Locking with solenoid - 440G-MT
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Safety-InterlockSwitches/440G-MT-Guard-Locking-Solenoid-Switches
The 440G-MT solenoid switch is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking
interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated and
ensures that it remains isolated while the guard is open. The guard may only be
opened when a signal is applied to the internal solenoid which releases the lock
mechanism. The 440G-MT locking mechanism withstands forces up to 1600N
(360lbs) and the die-cast alloy housing is ideal for use in harsh environments.
•
•
•
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI
B11.19, AS4024.1
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
cULus, TUV
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 24 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
30mm x 144mm mounting holes
Rotating head
No LED's, No ronus (override) key
Power to unlock
10 pin mini connector with pin-out as shown
•
•
•
•
•
2 sets of NC contacts (safety)
1 set of NO contacts (door open)
IP 65 (with connector)
24 DC Versions
This switch comes with mini QD connector
3.4.6 Tongue Switch without solenoid – 440K-MT-GD2
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/sensors-switches/safety-interlockswitches/mt-gd2-tongue-interlock-switches
The MT-GD2 is a robust tongue actuated safety interlock switch designed to
fit at the opening edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry
slots and rotatable head, the MT-GD2 can offer eight different options for
actuator entry. The MT-GD2 features a compact housing of only 117mm x
40mm x 43mm (4.61in x 1.57in x 1.69in) with DIN standard fixing centers
and includes forced guided contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 25 of 143
The MT-GD2 is available with 2 N.C. + 1 N.O., contact sets enabling it to be used as part of a system for
higher-risk applications. The unit is sealed to IP67 and has 1 conduit entry 1/2in . Operation of the switch
is achieved by the insertion of the specially profiled stainless steel actuator which should be permanently
fixed to the leading edge of the guard door. An optional flexible actuator allows the MT-GD2 to operate
on smaller radii doors (>60mm (2.36in)) and a flat actuator gives additional mounting options.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
60mm x 30mm mounting holes
Non mechanical release
Rotating head
No LED's
No ronus (override) key
Power to unlock
9 pin mini connector with pin-out as
shown
2 sets of normally closed contacts
(safety)
1 set of normally open contacts (door
open)
IP 65 (with connector)
24 DC Versions
•
This switch comes with mini QD
connector
3.4.7 Guard Locking Switches: 440G-LZ
The 440G-LZ Guard Locking Switch is designed for partial body access guard
doors. This switch combines microprocessor technology with an RFID coded
actuator, and it features a locking bolt drive mechanism that locks only when
the correct actuator is detected. With this functionality, the switch is TÜV
certified to Ple, Cat. 4 (EN/ISO 13849-1) which is the highest level of safety
for guard door position and lock monitoring.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Safety-InterlockSwitches/440G-LZ-Guard-Locking-Switches
Features
•
•
•
Consumes up to 60% less power than competitive products
Offers RFID standard coded (low) or uniquely coded (high) actuators
Available in two models: power-to-release (safety of people) and power-to-lock (machine
protection)
Products
•
440G-LZ Guard Locking Switch
Certifications
•
CE marked for all applicable EU directives, cULus (UL508), TÜV, C-tick
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/ca/s118-ca502_-en-p.pdf
3.4.8 Guard Locking Switches: 440G-TLS-Z GD2
The TLS-Z GD2 Guard Locking Switch is an interlock switch that has a
uniquely coded RFID door sensor with inductive door position sensing
technology. This switch can detect if an actuator key breaks or becomes
separated from its door mounted position. Built with the same solid-state
technology as the TLS GD2, this switch supports the highest level of safety –
Performance Level “e” (Ple) to EN ISO 13849-1.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Safety-InterlockFile Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 26 of 143
Switches/TLS-Z-GD2-Guard-Locking-Switches
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Uniquely coded RFID door sensor
Solid-state OSSD outputs connectable to ISO 14119
Available in power-to-release or power-to-lock models
Easy QD connection
High locking force ≤2000 N (450 lb)
Products
•
440G TLS-Z GD2 Guard Locking Switch
Certifications
•
CE Marked for all applicable EU directives, cULus (UL 508), and TÜV
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 440G TLS-Z-GD2 Guard Locking Switches, including:
• Actuators
• Bolts
• Covers
• Emergency override keys
• Flexible release cables
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/ca/s118-ca500_-en-p.pdf
3.4.9 Prosafe™ Trapped Key Interlock: 440T
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/3377539/5866177/3377559/638
7374/6387378/
Key interlock systems can be configured to ensure a predetermined
sequence of events takes place or that hazards have been reduced
before operators can become exposed to them. It is a mechanical
system and is therefore widely used in applications including those
where the location of plant, environment or explosive atmospheres
make the use of electrical interlock systems unsuitable or expensive
to install. In addition, unique coding can be provided, lending to a
greater degree of security and tamper resistant.
CE Marking—Tested and Approved
Only Prosafe products carry the prestigious BG mark: a sign of
safety, independently tested by the German Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für
Arbeitssicherneit, ‘BIA’. Additional tests for valve interlocks include Lloyds Certificate for fire test
and salt-mist resistance. Switches and sensors carry the necessary ‘BASEEFA’ approvals while
isolator switches carry UL, CSA and TUV approvals.
•
•
•
•
•
All stainless interlocking and coded parts—
including the code barrel and internal
components at no extra cost.
Weather cap as standard—no extra charge
for dust caps and seals.
Standard red colour-coded key and ID
tags—at no extra charge.
Custom colour/text keys and ID tags—
nominal extra charge.
A complete range of isolators, key
exchange, miniature valve interlocks and
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 27 of 143
gate interlocks—all using the same key
principle.
3.4.10 Non Contact Interlocks Sipha – 440N-S
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Safety-InterlockSwitches/Sipha-Sensors
Sipha’s design incorporates magnetically sensitive elements which must be
triggered in a particular sequence to operate correctly. The Sipha sensor
helps prevent defeatability by a simple magnet. The Sipha Sensor must be
connected to the Sipha control unit giving a monitored circuit. For high-risk applications the control
unit is used with a single sensor to give a high-integrity system. For other applications, multiple
sensors can be connected to one Sipha control unit. Sipha has facilities for connecting a manual
reset button and for monitoring external devices such as contactors.
Four types of sensors and actuators are
available incorporating different operating
distances and physical sizes.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Non contact actuation
Magnetic coded sensing
Four housing styles
Must be operated with its own safety control unit
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN, 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1,
NFPA79, EN1088
Category Cat. 3 and Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
3.4.11 SensaGuard – 440N-Z
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Safety-InterlockSwitches/Non-Contact-Interlock-Switches
SensaGuard non-contact safety switches are Category 4 /SIL 3 rated switches
per EN954-1, TÜV functional safety approved to IEC61508.
Featuring the latest generation of RFID technology for coding and inductive
technology for sensing, SensaGuard large sensing range and tolerance to
misalignment is a cost-effective solution that is ideally suited for a wide range of industrial safety
applications.
Switches can be connected to a standard safety relay, for example, the MSR126, MSR127,
MSR200/300 Family, SmartGuard™ and Safety I/O Blocks. There are multiple actuator sizes for
large sensing distance.
•
•
•
•
•
Multiple actuator sizes for large sensing distance
typically (15 – 25mm)
IP69K environmental rating
Short circuit and over voltage protection
LED located on the switch for door status and
troubleshooting
2 Safety PNP outputs and 1 auxiliary PNP output
3.4.12 Safety Contactors – 100S / 104S
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/motor-control/iec-contactors/iec-safetycontactors
Bulletin 100S-C/104S-C safety contactors provide mechanically linked,
positively guided contacts, which are required in feedback circuits for
modern safety applications. The positively guided N.C. auxiliary contacts will
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 28 of 143
not change state when a power contact welds. For additional information and selection of overload
relays, mounting systems, and other MCS components, please see Publication 100-SG003C-EN-P.
WHEN USING 24VDC SAFETY CIRCUITS, USE OF GOLD PLATED, BIFURCATED CONTACTS
IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gold plated, bifurcated control circuit contacts
Low power reliability down to 5V, 3mA
Red contact housing for easy identification
Permanently fixed front mounted auxiliary contact block
Protective cover prevents manual operation
Meets IEC 60947-5-1 Annex L requirements for “Mechanically Linked” contact
performance for both contactors and relays
Meets IEC 60947-4-1 Annex F requirements for “Mirror Contact” performance for
contactors
Meets GM DHS-1 “Design for Health and Safety” requirements
SUVA third party certified to IEC 60947-5-1 Annex L and IEC 60947-4-1 Annex F
3.4.13 IEC Safety Control Relays – 700S-CF
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/700S-CF-IEC-Safety-Control-Relays
Bulletin 700S-CF Safety Control Relays provide mechanically linked, positively guided
contacts, which are required in feedback circuits for modern safety applications. WHEN
USING 24VDC SAFETY CIRCUITS, USE OF GOLD PLATED, BIFURCATED
CONTACTS IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED.
•
•
•
•
Gold Plated, Bifurcated Version for Low Level Switching
Applications
Front-mounted auxiliary contact (Permanently fixed, Protective
cover to prevent manual operation, Red contact housing for easy
identification, Incorporates IEC 60947-5-1 “Mechanically Linked”
symbol)
AC and DC operating coils
SUVA third-party certification
3.4.14 NEMA Safety Contactors: Heavy-Duty Safety Control Relay – 700S-P, 700S-PK
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/NEMA-Heavy-Duty-Relays
• Mechanically Linked Contacts meet IEC 9475-1-L
• 2…12 poles – all Mechanically Linked
• Red Cover for Easy Identification of Safety
Circuits
• IEC Mechanically linked Contacts Symbol
Displayed on Front
• Visual Indication of Contact State
• UL Listed (File No.
E14840) (Guide No.
NKCR) per UL 508
• CSA Certified (File No.
LR1234) per CSA C22.2
No. 14
• CE Certified
3.4.15 NEMA enclosed Safety Disconnects - 1494G
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A,
supplement SB for Short Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/Disconnect-Switches/NEMA-Disconnect-Switches
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 29 of 143
Disconnect Switch: The Switch blades are fully exposed when the disconnect switch is deenergized for instant visual status. Switch, mechanism and handle are always connected,
even when the enclosure door is open. Line shield prevents accidental contact with the line
side of the switch. Protective fuse cover (optional) prevents accidental contact with the load
side of the switch, power fuses and load side power wire connections
•
•
cULus Listed per UL 98 for switches 30…600A
UL Listed per UL 508 “at motor” disconnect rating for switches 30…100 A
Optional Components: For factory modification or field installation:
• Door viewing window
• Auxiliary contacts and Electrical interlocks
• Pilot light, selector switch, push button, and
Protective fuse covers
• Metal and stainless steel disconnect
handles
• Fuse clip kits, Conduit connectors,
Ground lugs
Disconnect Handle: Ruggedly-designed molded handle optionally available with painted metal or
stainless steel. Color-coded handle for instant visual status to determine if the switch is “ON” (red) or
“OFF” (green or black). They can be padlocked in the “OFF” position with up to three (3) shackle-type
padlocks and in the “ON” position with one (1) shackle-type padlock. When the switch is energized, the
defeater screw must be deliberately turned to open the door. When the enclosure door is open the
defeater lever must be deliberately moved to energize the disconnect switch.
Enclosure: Industrial grade construction available in painted metal (Type 3R/4/12), stainless steel (Type
4/4X) and non-metallic (Type 4/4X) material for use in most industrial environments. Padlocking
provision to restrict the enclosure door from being opened to gain access inside the enclosure is
available. Mounting feet are provided.
600V 3-Pole, 3-Phase
•
•
•
•
•
•
30…600 A (500 Hp)
Fusible and non-fusible versions
Can accommodate Class H/K, R, and J fuse clips
Up to 200,000 A short-circuit withstand rating with proper fusing
Available in standard size (1494G) and extra-capacity enclosures (1494GX)
Enclosures: Type 3R/4/12 painted metal, Type 4/4X stainless steel, Type 4/4X
non-metallic
600V 6-Pole 3-Phase
•
•
•
•
•
30…200 A (150 Hp)
Fusible and non-fusible versions
Can accommodate Class H/K and J fuses
Up to 200,000 A short-circuit withstand rating with proper fusing
Enclosures: Type 3R/4/12 painted metal and Type 4/4X stainless
steel
3.4.16 Safety Connection Systems – 898R, 898D
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Connection-Devices/Safety-ConnectionSystems
3.4.16.1
•
•
•
•
Quick Distribution Systems with Enunciation
Eight 6-pin micro connectors
14-conductor main cable
Individual enunciation outputs or each port
For use in category 2 or 3 systems per EN 954-1
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 30 of 143
•
•
Enclosure rating IP67, NEMA 69
Prewired for dual-channel N.C. safety plus individual N.O. enunciation
3.4.16.2
•
•
•
•
•
Quick Distribution Systems without Annunciation
Prewired for dual-channel (one N.O./one N.C.) safety
4 or 8 safety-wired 4-pin DC micro connectors
4-pin male DC micro pigtail main connection
For use in category 2 or 3 systems per EN 954-1
Enclosure rating IP67, NEMA 69
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 31 of 143
4 Machine Alert machine protection
http://www.ab.com/es/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229258/3170949/10357727/
Document Reference: Sensors C115R-CA001A-EN-P
Machine Alert products are economical, supplemental motor protection for protecting equipment
investment and minimizing downtime. These full range of function-specific devices are available in
compact 22.5mm and 45mm packages
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4.1
Microprocessor technology
Password protection
Compact size saves valuable panel space
LCD / keypad programming takes the guesswork out of device setup
DIN rail mounting makes installation a snap
Terminals provide IP 20 finger safety and are clearly marked
LED’s or LCD display provides relay status indication
Global acceptance with CE, CSA and UL approvals
Phase monitors – 813S
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/Supplementary-Protection/Phase-Monitors
Monitors that guard against the damaging effects of phase loss, under and over voltage, phase
imbalance, and phase reversal for applications such as:
•
Pumps, Compressors, Fans, Blowers
Type E2
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable settings
o under voltage, over voltage
o phase imbalance
o time delay, relay energize
o time delay, relay de-energize
RMS based voltage monitoring up-to 690 Vac
Pre-start as well as running protection
Automatic reset
(1) N.O. and (1) changeover contact
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 32 of 143
4.2
Current monitors – 809S
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/Supplementary-Protection/CurrentMonitors
Monitors that provide the added benefits of under and over current detection for applications such as:
•
Conveyors, Fans, Pumps, Mixers
Type E1
•
•
•
•
Single-phase current or voltage monitoring
o 0.5 … 5A ac/dc
o 1.0 … 24.9V or 10 … 249V ac/dc
Programmable settings
o actuation value, release value, delay time
Automatic reset
(1) changeover contact
Type E2
•
•
•
•
Single-phase current monitoring
o 1.0 … 15A ac/dc
Programmable settings
o actuation value, release value,
o time delay, relay energize
o time delay, relay de-energize
Automatic reset
(1) N.O. and (1) changeover contact
Type E3
•
•
•
•
Three-phase current monitoring
o 0.5 … 5A ac
Programmable settings
o under or overcurrent, phase imbalance/failure
o time delay, relay energize
o time delay, relay de-energize
Automatic reset
(1) N.O. and (1) changeover contact
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 33 of 143
4.3
Thermistor monitors – 817S
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229258/3170949/1521151/tab3.html
Monitors that protect equipment from over temperature conditions for applications such as:
•
•
Motors: VFD applications AND High ambient environment
Bearings, Transformers, Heating systems
Type E1
•
•
•
•
No settings necessary
LED status indicator: Power-up indication AND Trip identification
Automatic reset
(1) N.O., (1) N.C. contacts
Type E2
•
•
•
•
•
No settings necessary
LED status indicator: Power-up indication AND Trip identification
Automatic, manual or remote reset
(2) N.O. contacts (independent relays)
Unlimited status storage
5 Signaling Devices
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Push-Buttons-and-Signaling-Devices
5.1
70mm Control Tower™ Stack Lights - 855T
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229246/2531107/229856/
• UL Listed and rated Type 4/4X/13,
IP65
• No-tools-required assembly
• Light or sound modules
• Light with sound modules
• Surface mounting or Pole Mounting
• Right angle / vertical mounting
5.2
•
•
•
•
Socket mount LED’s
Wired or
DeviceNet™
connectivity
24V DC
Pre-assembled or as
loose modules
50mm Control Tower™ Stack Lights - 855E
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229246/2531107/229864/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surface mounting where minimal height is required
Pole mounting for increased visibility
Side mounting for vertical equipment surfaces and walls
Six lens colors: red, amber, green, blue, yellow, and clear
LED in steady or flashing, and strobe
Available pre-assembled or as individual modules
UL rated Type 4/4X/13, and IP65, CUL, and CE listed
Broad line of stack light products
o Light modules, sound modules, or Light with sound modules
o 13 base options
o socket mount LED’s
Standard in 24V DC
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 34 of 143
5.3
70mm Control tower – 855F
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229246/2531107/7487004/
Allen-Bradley Compact Control Tower Stack Lights are now available in 70mm
diameter. This new line is fully assembled, pre-wired and tested at the factory. In
order to meet a wide range of signaling applications, LED light modules are
offered in Steady and Flashing versions and sound modules in Pulsing and
Steady versions. The 855F 70mm Compact Control Tower Lights are custom
configured and offered in a wide range of mounting options, voltages, and colors.
Advantages
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5.4
UL Type 4/4X/13, IP65
Configurable to up to 5 light modules, 4 light modules with a single-circuit
sound module, or 3 light modules with a dual-circuit sound module
Lens color matches LED color for improved optics. Available in six colors
(Green, Red, Amber, Blue, Clear and Yellow)
Piezo sound module (100dB @ 1 meter) available for continuous or
pulsing sound
Power bases available in 3 versions to meet most global applications:
24V AC/DC, 120V AC, and 240V AC
Pre-wired bases for easier and safer installation
Flexible mounting options including direct mount, vertical bracket, pole
mount with foot, and surface mount
Lenses and housings made of impact resistant polycarbonate
cULus listed and CE marked
40mm and 60mm Control Tower – 854J, 854K
•
854J (40 mm) and 854K (60 mm)
– Modular construction
– cULus Type 4/4x/13, IP66
• Indoor/ Outdoor use
– Offered as separate components or as Pre-configured
arrangements
– features/options
• Strobe LED
• Multi flash Module
• Double sided Base
• Plastic Base Extension
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Signaling-Devices/854J-854K-Control-TowerStack-Lights
5.5
Horns – 855H
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229246/7804386/229860/
The Allen-Bradley Bulletin 855H offers multi-tone and volume control
capabilities in each device. The horns are available as stand-alone
devices or with high visibility beacons attached. All horns can be
purchased with a combination strobe beacon available in 6 lens colors,
allowing optional visual and audible signal combinations
5.6
Industrial Beacons - 855B
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 35 of 143
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229246/2531105/
Bulletin 855B — Mini Square Beacons
•
•
High Intensity 5 Joule Strobe Beacon
IP66/UL Type 13/3R
Bulletin 855BS/855BM/855BL — Round Beacons
•
•
•
•
•
5.7
6 Colors available
LED functions:
o Single color with user-selectable steady burning or flashing function
o Three color (red, green, amber)
o Strobe with user-selectable single or double flash
Surface, NPT conduit, or Tube Mounting options
Pre-existing functions:
o Halogen functions: Steady, Flashing, or Rotating
o User-selectable Rotation Speed (90 or 180 rpm) on Rotating version
o Xenon function: Strobe
UL Type 4/4X/13, IP65 except LED Beacons which are NEMA 4/4X/13,
IP65
Bulletin 855P Panel Mount Alarms
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229246/229858/
The Allen-Bradley Panel Mount Alarms family offers a visual and
acoustic signaling solution. Bulletin 855P panel mount alarms and the
855PD dual-circuit panel mount alarms offer a high level of
environmental integrity to your panel with UL Type 4/4X/13, IP65
ratings.
Advantages
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5.8
Reduce panel space by 50% — ideal for applications with space restrictions
Initial-buy and installed-cost savings by providing two independent signals in a single device
(855PD)
Mount in a standard 22.5 mm or 30 mm hole (with adapter ring)
Selectable continuous or pulsing sounders and flashing or steady LED available
Panel mount strobe light version available
UL Type 4/4X/13, IP65 rated
Sound output range from 80 dB to 103 dB @ 1 meter
Adjustable volume
Available in 24V and 120V other voltages available with extended lead time
Finger-safe terminal block — IP2X rated
Rear securing eliminates unauthorized product removal
cULus listed and CE Marked
Bulletin 800F 22mm LED Illuminated & non-Illuminated Operators
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Push-Buttons/800F-Round-Push-Buttons
The 800F line of 22.5 mm push buttons is designed and manufactured to
demanding performance specifications. Using state-of-the-art solid modeling
techniques and finite element analysis, every component built into 800F Push
Buttons is optimized for durability and performance.
Worldwide Solutions:
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 36 of 143
•
Designed to World Wide Standards
•
Operator caps, legend plates and inserts available with international symbols, foreign languages, and
custom markings.
Durable Materials
•
•
800FP operators are made of industrial grade thermoplastic for superior chemical resistance.
800FM operators are constructed of tough die cast zinc alloy, finished with chromate plating.
Standard Operators
• IP 66 and Type 4/13
• Diaphragm seals
- Most linear travel devices
- No lubrication
• K-seals
- Rotating devices such as
twist-to-release E-stops
and Selector Switches.
- Dual wiping action
- High pressure sealing
QuadCONNECT™ Contact Blocks –
a Low Voltage Exclusive
• Direct drive mechanism
- Positive actuation
• Independent and sequential
operation of contact fingers
- Minimized contact bounce
• Self-cleaning contact wiping
- Increased contact reliability
- Long life.
• Reliability operation in applications
below 17V, 5 mA down to 5V, 1 mA
Selector Switches
• Rigid teeth
• Positive detent
• No hang-up between positions
• Constant energy solution
• Vibration insensitive
Self-Monitoring™ Contact Blocks
• Ensures NC contact opens
when E-stop is actuated
• Monitors proper installation between:
- Operator and latch
- Latch and S.M.C.B.
6 Photoelectric Sensors
6.1
Photoelectric Sensors: Series 9000
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/2051089/6270353/6647249/6647253/8445690/
The Series 9000 photoelectric sensors are designed to perform in the harshest of
industrial environments. The sensor will withstand 1200psi (8270kPa) high
temperature, high pressure washdowns, commonly found in the food and beverage
industry. All adjustments are made on a user interface panel located under the top,
clear cover. This panel contains three LED status indicators highly visible from 360º
around the sensor.
• 4-pin micro M-12 QD connector
• 10–30V DC, IP67 with LED indicators
• Harsh duty 30mm package
• Wide selection of sensing modes and operating modes
• Standard ON/OFF and timing versions, Fast response time
• Variety of connection types
• Time delay models offer additional application flexibility
• A unique, easy-to-use fiber optic cable locking mechanism
speeds installation of fiber optic models
• On/Off Timing models available with a wide range of supply
voltages
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 37 of 143
•
•
•
•
Darkroom sensors for use in the manufacture of photographic
materials
DeviceNet™ network compatible offering direct connection to the Industry-standard device
network
Diagnostic models with a choice of Static or Dynamic diagnostic capability for best response
NEMA 3, 4X, 6P, 12, 13, IP67
6.2 Photoelectric Sensors: LaserSight – 42CM
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/2051089/6270353/6647249/664725
3/8445682/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.3
Class 1 laser, Fast response time—less than 0.7ms
Teach capabilities, Contrast Detection, Three sensing modes
Error Proofing
Small spot size—0.1mm @ 100mm sensing
distance
Metal housing for heavy duty industrial
applications
18mm industry standard package, 30V DC
operation
NPN or PNP outputs
2m cable or micro QD connector
CE or cULus marked, meets or exceeds IEC
60947-5-2
Photoelectric Sensors: RightSight - 42EF
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/2051089/6270353/6647249/6647253/8444337/
Right-Sight sensors can be through-hole mounted flush against a mounting surface or
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 38 of 143
can be attached with an 18mm threaded mounting nose or base. Just 35mm (1.4in)
deep, it can be used in many areas where industry-standard 18mm mounting is
desired and a short mounting depth is required
•
•
•
•
•
6.4
•
•
•
•
4-pin micro M-12 QD
connector
10–30V DC, with LED
Compact right angle
housing
Flexible 18mm mounting
options
1200psi washdown rating
•
No user adjustments
360º visible LED indicators
NEMA 4X, 6P, IP67
Reverse polarity protection, Shortcircuit protected outputs
Fast 1ms response time (DC), False
pulse protection
Photoelectric Sensors: MiniSight – 42KL
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/General-Purpose-PhotoelectricSensors/MiniSight-Sensors
Mini-Sight photoelectric sensors are interchangeable with many other standard
18mm threaded barrel photoelectric sensors. These sensors can also be used
where rugged performance is required. MiniSight sensors will withstand 1200 psi
high pressure, 60°C (140°F) high temperature washdowns.
•
•
•
•
4-pin micro M-12 QD connector
10–30V DC, with LED indicators
Compact rectangular size with standard
18mm mounting nose
Visible indicators for power, output, and
2.5X margin/short circuit
•
•
•
Short circuit protection in all
versions, including two-wire
universal voltage versions
False pulse protection
Switch selectable light or dark
operation
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 39 of 143
•
•
•
6.5
•
•
•
Access to sensor adjustments through
captive cover that does not require tools
for access
Eight sensing modes available
Rated to withstand high temperature
1200 psi washdowns
•
300µs high speed DC versions
NEMA 4X, 6P, IP67
UL, CSA, and CE marked for all
applicable directives
NPN will not be used for Chrysler
Powertrain
Photoelectric Sensors: Metal Cylindrical – 42CM (18mm), 42CF (12mm)
The 42CM and 42CF are metal body photoelectric sensors intended for heavy
duty industrial applications. They are packaged in a rugged 18 mm or 12mm
cylindrical housing.
6.5.1
18mm Metal Cylindrical – 42CM
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/General-PurposePhotoelectric-Sensors/18-mm-Metal-Cylindrical-Sensors
•
•
•
4-pin micro M-12 QD connector
10–30V DC, IP67 with LED
indicators
18mm industry standard package,
IP67
•
•
•
Wide selection of sensing modes
Fast response time
Background suppression available
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 40 of 143
6.5.2
12MM Metal Cylindrical – 42CF
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/General-PurposePhotoelectric-Sensors/12-mm-Metal-Cylindrical-Sensors
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.6
4-pin micro M-12 QD connector
10–30V DC, IP67 with LED indicators
12mm industry standard package, IP67
Wide selection of sensing modes
PNP outputs
Fast response time
Local teach button
Accepts remote teach input
Photoelectric Sensors: Ultrasonic Sensor – 873P
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Ultrasonic-Sensors/Analog-orDiscrete-Output-Ultrasonic-Sensors
Bulletin 873P Programmable Ultrasonic Sensors are self-contained solid-state
devices designed for noncontact sensing of solid and liquid objects. Available with a
30mm barrel diameter constructed from PBT plastic and meets IP67 enclosure
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 41 of 143
standards. Two programmable setpoints with sourcing (PNP) outputs that can be configured for N.O. or
N.C. operation. They feature a 4–20mA or 0–10V DC analog output.
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.7
4-pin micro M-12 QD connector
Chrysler Powertrain use Only
10–30V DC, IP67 with LED indicators
PNP Brown=Pos(+) Blue=Neg (-)
White= Hold Black=Load Load
Sensing ranges from 150mm to 3500mm
Programmable, Discrete and Analog models
cULus listed and CE marked for all applicable directives
Short circuit, overload, false pulse, transient noise and reverse polarity protection
Photoelectric Sensors: Multi-Sight– 48-MS
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/sensors-switches/photoelectric-visionsensors/48ms-multisight-photoelectric-sensors
The MultiSight is an optical multi-pixel sensor with a pass/fail PNP output. The MultiSight uses three
different methods of evaluation (pattern matching, contrast, and brightness) to detect or differentiate
objects by means of previously defined optical characteristics, e.g. for separating “good” and “bad” parts.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.8
Stand-alone vision sensor
Compact, sturdy industrial housing with IP67 rating
Integrated lighting
Adjustable focus from 20 mm to infinity
Short evaluation time (50…100 ms)
3 evaluation methods: pattern matching, brightness, and contrast
10 virtual detectors
Individual virtual detectors can be logically linked or grouped for evaluation
of different objects with several characteristics for inspection
Ethernet connection for setup
45LMS – Photoelectric Laser Measurement Sensor
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Laser-Sensors/45LMSMeasurement-Laser-Sensors
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 42 of 143
Rockwell Automation is proud to introduce the 45LMS laser measurement sensor to its family.
Available in three diff erent ranges: 8 m (26.25 ft) diff use, 15 m (49.21 ft) diff use and 50 m (164.04 ft)
retroreflective, the Allen-Bradley® 45LMS utilizes the Time of Flight (ToF) principle and has a relatively
small beam spot – even at 50 m away. Completely self-contained, this sensor does not require any
external
control devices which add cost and require additional mounting space.
The 45LMS is easily set up by mounting the sensor such that the target is within the operating range of
the sensor and teaching in the appropriate set-points required for the application. All sensors in this
family have one discrete output with one analog output. The discrete output can be wired for either
light operate (L.O.) or dark operate (D.O.) and the analog output is automatically scaled between the
selected set-points with either a positive or negative slope.
The 45LMS is a great solution for long range detection/measurement for the following applications:
distance measurement, verifying material position, stack level, thickness measurement, roll diameter,
positioning fi xtures, error proofi ng inspection, long standoff distance presence/absence, level
monitoring, crane crash protection and other diffi cult applications that exceed the capabilities of
standard diff use or background suppression photosensors.
Features
•
Eye Safe Class 1 or Class 2 laser (by model)
•
Sensing ranges of 8 m (26 ft), 15 m (49 ft.) or 50 m (164 ft), dependent on model
•
One discrete output (1 x NPN/PNP) and one analog output (1 x 4…20 mA)
•
Accurate to ± 25 mm (± 0.98 in.)
•
Fast response time of 10 ms
•
Easy setup of switch points or analog scaling using programming buttons
•
IP65 enclosure
•
Self-contained sensor
•
Operating temperature of -30…50° C (-22…122° F)
7 Encoders – 845H / 845T / 844D / 845G / 842D
7.1
Bulletin 845H High-Performance Industrial Incremental Encoder
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/motion-control/high-performance-incrementaloptical-encoder
The 845H provides forty-two code disk resolutions of up to 5,000 pulses per
revolution and features state-of-the-art circuitry. The 845H is the industry standard
Size 25 incremental encoder. With an electronic frequency response of 210 kHz, the 845H can provide
2,048 pulses per revolution at an operating speed of 6,000 revolutions per minute. Various output
signal types are available in order to connect to a wide range of controllers.
7.2
Bulletin 845T Heavy-Duty Incremental Encoder
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/Heavy-Duty-IncrementalOptical-Encoder
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 43 of 143
The Bulletin 845T encoder is a heavy-duty, NEMA Type 4 and IP66-rated
incremental shaft encoder that is housed in a compact, two-inch-diameter
enclosure. The 845T provides code disk resolutions up to 3,000 PPR and
a frequency response of up to 100kHz. Typical applications for the 845T
include machine tools, packaging machinery, motion controls and
robotics.
•
•
•
•
•
•
7.3
Industry standard size 20, rugged, die-cast aluminum
housing
NEMA Type 4, & IP66 (IEC529) rated enclosure
15,000 RPM maximum slew speed
Code disk resolution of up to 3,000 pulses per revolution
Optional gated index
Overvoltage and short circuit protection
Bulletin 844D Hollow-Shaft Incremental Encoder
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/High-Frequency-IncrementalOptical-Encoder
Bulletin 844D blind-shaft and through-shaft incremental encoders mount directly
to the monitored shaft via a split collar clamp on the encoder, eliminating the
need for mounting plates and flexible couplings. As a result, overall cost and size
are reduced considerably. Through-shaft models are installed by inserting the
monitored shaft completely through the encoder, while blind-shaft models only
require insertion of the end of the shaft. Shaft position is converted to digital
pulses in an “A quad B” format.
An important feature of the 844D is high frequency response: 300 kHz for line
drivers up to 8,192 PPR and 600 kHz above 8,192 PPR. This allows both high
resolution (10,000 and 16,384 PPR) and high shaft speed (over 2,000 RPM at
16,384 PPR).
7.4
Bulletin 845G Single-Turn Absolute Encoder
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/Single-Turn-HighPerformance-Absolute-Encoder
The Bulletin 845G is a NEMA Type 4 and 13, single-turn absolute encoder that
digitizes shaft position for reliable readouts under a wide range of harsh conditions.
This family has been enhanced to include BCD and Natural Binary outputs, push-pull
and SSI output configurations and an increased operating temperature of 85°C.
As an added convenience, the 845G incorporates a zero set pin. Most absolute
encoders must be de-coupled from the monitored shaft to synchronize the
electrical and mechanical zero or home positions. The 845G can be set to zero by
connecting DC+ to the zero set pin.
7.5
Bulletin 842D DeviceNet™ Multi-Turn Absolute Encoder
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/DeviceNet-Multi-Turn-MagneticAbsoluteBulletin 842D is a 26-bit absolute multi-turn shaft encoder offering direct
connection to DeviceNet™ for advanced functionality with reduced wiring cost.
This network capability eliminates the need for dedicated input cards and allows connection to the
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 44 of 143
DeviceNet™ trunk line via a low-cost five-pin micro quick disconnect. Up to sixty-three 842D DeviceNet™
encoders can be interfaced to a PLC or other logic system through a single network connection. Providing
up to 8,192 counts per revolution (CPR) over a maximum of 8,192 turns, the 842D also incorporates
advanced diagnostics and many programmable options.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eight programmable cam functions that set a bit when the
position is within one of eight value ranges
Programmable code direction (CW or CCW position increment)
Offset value enables the user to reset the output in relation to the
machine's mechanical position
Output scaling, which lets you set the optimal counts per
revolution for a particular application
Rugged magnetic technology allows high-shock loading (100 g
for 6 ms) and vibration (20 g at 10–2000 Hz)
High temperature (85°C operating) and high humidity (98%)
operation
Multi-turn counting is accomplished through gearing and
magnets
Absolute position is saved on power failure without any battery
back-up
Change of State (COS) operating mode optimizes network
bandwidth
8 Condition Sensing Switches and Controls
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Temperature-Switches/Solid-State-TemperatureSwitches
The Allen-Bradley Condition Sensing product family offers exceptional control for automatic
operation of machines and processes. As the link in an electrical circuit, condition sensors supply
control intelligence at important values and either communicate information to automatically
sequence equipment or provide a signal to operators for manual operation. When properly applied,
Allen-Bradley Condition Sensing devices can lower your total operating costs by helping to
improve processes and systems, reduce downtime, protect expensive equipment, and safeguard
operators.
Rockwell Automation knows that Condition Sensing controls are vital components in today's
control systems. High-quality materials, outstanding workmanship, and rigid standards are
combined to manufacture these highly reliable, world-class controls. Most devices are UL Listed,
CSA Certified and CE Compliant.
8.1
Solid State Pressure Switch – 836E
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Condition-Sensors
•
•
•
•
•
Microprocessor based with no moving parts for longer life and reduced
downtime
Rugged, corrosion-resistant 316L stainless steel housing features an IP66
enclosure rating to withstand harsh industrial conditions
Operating pressures from --15…6,000 psi (gauge)
Industry-leading four-digit 14-segment digital display
Independently programmable dual PNP N.O./N.C.
outputs or 4…20 mA analog output
•
Stainless steel sensing element
•
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 45 of 143
8.2
Solid State Temperature Switch – 837E
http://www.ab.com/conditionsensing/temperature/solidstate.html
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microprocessor based with no moving parts
Rugged, corrosion-resistant 316L stainless steel housing features an
IP66 enclosure rating
Media temperature range from -50° to 150° C (-58° to 302°F)
Operating temperatures from -25° to 85° C (-13° to 185°F)
Industry-leading four digit 14-segment digital display
Dual NO/NC independently programmable PNP outputs
Stainless steel probe
Chrysler
Powertrain use
Only PNP
Brown=Pos(+)
Blue=Neg (-)
White= Load NC
8.3
Flow Switch – 839E
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Flow-Switches
Applications include Coolant Systems, Liquid Media, and Hydraulics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
cULus, CE marked for all applicable directives, and 3 A authorized
only with sanitary adaptor
Microprocessor based with no moving parts for longer life and
reduced downtime
Corrosion resistant 316 stainless steel housing features an IP 68
enclosure rating
Flow rates of liquid media (calorimetric measuring principle) in the
range from 0.03-3 m/s (0.1…9.84 ft/s)
Industry leading four-digit 14-segment digital display
Dual NO/NC programmable PNP outputs or 4…20 mA analog output
with single PNP output
Stainless steel probe
Chrysler
Powertrain use
Only PNP
Brown=Pos(+)
Blue=Neg (-)
White= Load NC
8.4
Speed Sensing Switches
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/Speed-SensingSwitches/808-Speed-Sensing-Switches
Bulletin 808 Speed Sensing Switches
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 808 Speed Switches provide flexibility for the basic
functions required of rotating machinery. Mechanically connected to a
machine, these devices provide an electrical contact signal at a determined
speed for plugging, anti-plugging, speed sensing and direction of rotation.
Standard Features
•
Speed setting from 15 - 1,000 RPM
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 46 of 143
•
Shaft speeds up to 2,000 RPM
•
Double-shaft seal with long-life precision bearings
•
Four mounting arrangements
•
Safety lock-out solenoid available
•
Available in Type 1, 4/13 and enclosures
•
A superior design withstands the toughest applications. This line of products is not affected by
switching due to noise and spurious transients from AC or DC supplies.
Typical Applications
8.5
•
Machine tools
•
Conveyor sequence
•
Fan/pump rotation
•
Arrays
Part Verification Arrays for Bin-Picking Applications - 45PVA
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/sensors-switches/light-arrays/part-verificationphotoelectric-sensors
Allen-Bradley 45PVA designed for bin picking and object detection applications. The
45PVA is a direct response to the error-proofing measures and it effectively prevents
mis-picks. The 45PVA uses transmitted beam technology to create a light screen that
can be spanned across bins. By mounting the separate emitter and receiver units on
each side of a bin entry and wiring the receiver output into a controller programmed
with the necessary logic, a virtually error-free bin-picking process can be achieved. ‘Job
lights’ on the 45PVA will show the assembler the bins required to complete the current process and will
also indicate the correct picking sequence. In the event the assembler attempts to pick an incorrect part,
a warning light on the 45PVA will illuminate to indicate the error; additional fault enunciation can be
achieved via controller logic in conjunction with a tower light or audible alarm.
•
•
•
•
8.6
•
•
•
•
•
•
Robust metal enclosure with slim
13mm profile
Large highly-visible job indicator
lights
Optional Red warning light indicator
Dip switch selectable lighting
operation for job lights
4, 9, 12, 15 inch sensing heights
2m Sensing range, 35 mm res.
25- 60ms response time
12-24 VDC operation
2m Cable or 4 Pin Micro QD
DeviceNet Compatible
Area Array Two dimensional scanning technology – 45AST
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Sensors-Switches/LightArrays/Area-Photoelectric-Sensors
The Allen-Bradley 45AST Area Array is a compact nonsafety light screen for
small part detection and assembly applications. By installing a 45AST
emitter/receiver pair across each bin, interfacing the area array to a controller
and adding job lights or acoustic alarms, an error-free bin picking operation
can be established that sounds alarms in the event of a mispick or provides
visual indication for proper sequencing. “Two-Dimensional Array Scanning
Technology” allows the 45AST to sense an object regardless of its
orientation provided that one axial dimension meets the minimum resolution requirements.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 47 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduces Two-Dimensional Array
Scanning Technology
PNP Output
Sensing ranges up to 2m (6.5ft)
IP67 rated housing
CE marked for all applicable directives
Easy bracket-free mounting
Highly visible alignment LEDs
9 Circuit & Load Protection
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A, supplement SB for Short
Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
9.1
Motor Protection Breaker & Circuit Protectors
9.1.1
Motor Protection Circuit Breaker: 140MG
Bulletin 140MG Motor Circuit Protectors are available for a wide range of motor
sizes and installation types. Combine these circuit breakers with our NEMA and
IEC motor starters, overload relays, and contactors.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/MotorProtection/140MG-Motor-Circuit-Protectors
General Information
Motor Circuit Protectors may provide the following protective and control functions.
•
•
•
Disconnect for Motor Branch Circuit
Branch-Circuit, Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic Protection)
Switching (Manual)
In North America, electrical codes require that an individual Motor Branch Circuit be protected by a
UL/CSA Listed Fuse, Circuit Breaker or Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller.
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Includes current range of 3…1200 A
UL 489 listed/recognized for motor loads
Offers short-circuit only protection units in 3…1200 A
Offers combined short circuit and overload protection units in 3…150 A
Provides high current limiting and high switching capacity
Visible trip indication
High current limiting
High switching capacity
Shares wide range of accessories with Bulletin 140G molded case circuit breakers
Can be applied with NEMA and IEC contactors and overload relays
Products
•
•
•
•
•
140MG Motor Circuit Protectors, G-Frame
140MG Motor Circuit Protectors, H-Frame
140MG Motor Circuit Protectors, I-Frame
140MG Motor Circuit Protectors, J-Frame
140MG Motor Circuit Protectors, K-Frame
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 48 of 143
•
•
140MG Motor Circuit Protectors, M-Frame
140MG Motor Circuit Protectors, N-Frame
Certifications
CE Marked, cULus Listed, CCC, CSA Certified
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 140MG Motor Protection Circuit Breakers, including:
•
•
Auxiliary and trip contacts
Operating handles
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229469/12526041/Quick-Selection.html
9.1.2
Motor Protection - Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 140U-D
Bulletin 140U-D Molded Case Circuit Breakers are UL489 listed for global
applications. These circuit breakers are current limiting and provide fixed short
circuit and overcurrent protection. They offer high interrupting ratings for 2and 3-pole devices.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/circuit-and-load-protection/circuit-breakers/140u-circuit-breakers
Features
•
•
•
•
Available in 0.5...30 A current range
Provides 100% rating up to 15 A
Suitable for back feeding at 240V and 480Y/277V
Smaller footprint to reduce panel space
Products
•
140U Molded Case Circuit Breakers, D-frame
Certifications
•
UL 489 Listed, CSA Certified
Certifications apply when product is marked. See our Product Certification site for Declarations of
Conformity, certificates and other certification details.
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 140U D-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compact busbars
Eco connection modules
Extension shaft support
Feeder terminal for compact busbars
Flexible wire modules
Load terminal covers
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/305540/10913298/Accessories.html
9.1.3
Motor Protection Circuit Breaker: 140-M
Bulletin 140M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers can provide disconnect for motor
branch circuit, branch-circuit and short-circuit magnetic protection, overload
thermal protection, and manual switching. We offer multiple frame types to meet
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 49 of 143
your particular needs. Our factory-installed internal accessories make installation and wiring easy.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/allenbradley/type.page?RAProductId=140M+IEC+Circuit+Breakers&G1
1N/Locale=en
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Offers short-circuit protection
Offers visible trip indication
Includes high current limiting
Provides high switching capacity
Available in C-, D-, and E-Frame sizes
Products
140M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
•
•
Provides current range 0.1…630 A
cULus Listed as manual self-protected combination motor controller and as a manual motor
controller which includes thermal overload protection
140M Motor Circuit Protectors
•
•
Provides current range 0.16...1200 A
cULus Listed as a manual motor controller where overload protection must be provided separately
Certifications
CE Marked, cULus Listed, CCC, CSA Certified
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 140M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adapters
Auxiliary, alarm, and trip contacts
Busbars, feeder blocks, and feeder terminals
Coil and connecting modules
External operating handle
Operating mechanisms
Phase barriers
Shunt trips and undervoltage releases
Terminal lugs
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229469/3100802/tab8.html
9.2
Supplementary Protection
9.2.1
Supplementary Protectors: 1492-SPM
**** Note: Bulletin 1492-SPM family of supplementary protectors replaces Bulletin
1492-SP family of supplementary protectors. ****
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/Circuit-Breakers/1492Supplementary-Protectors#
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A,
supplement SB for Short Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 50 of 143
Bulletin 1492-SPM thermal magnetic Supplementary Protectors provide overcurrent protection for
equipment where branch circuit protection is already provided, or is not required. These devices are also
Miniature Circuit Breakers as defined by IEC Standards.
These supplementary protectors are offered as a broad portfolio of pole variants, current ratings, and trip
curves to match the appropriate level of protection for your application. They may be used with UL 508
Listed bus bars for convenience in panel assembly, a wide range of left-, right- and space saving bottommount accessories, and lock out attachments for safety during maintenance..
9.3
Fuse Holders
9.3.1
Fuse Holders: 1492-FB
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/CircuitBreakers/1492-FB-Fuse-Holders
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A, supplement SB for Short
Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
Class CC and J holders are UL listed for branch circuit protection in electrical distribution systems.
Midget holders are UL recognized. The Bulletin 1492-FB provides IP2 dead-front construction and is
designed to be IEC 529 finger-safe.
•
•
•
•
•
•
9.3.2
EN/IEC 60529 Finger Protection — Dead Front Construction
Handle Design Isolates the Fuse from Power When Opened for Fuse
Insertion or Removal
Compact Size Requiring Less Panel Space than Open-style Fuse
Holders
Optional Blown Fuse Indicators
Easy Insertion/Removal of Fuses, No Special Tools Required
Mounts on Standard 35 mm DIN Rail (A-B p/n 199-DR1
Fuse Holders: 140F
Bulletin 140F Fuse Holders are available for UL Class CC or Midget Fuses and
IEC 10 x 38 mm fuses, with or without blown fuse indication. They are lockable in
the open position and compatible with Bulletin 140M accessories.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/CircuitBreakers/140-F-Fuse-Holders
Features
•
•
Compact busbar and connectors for Bulletin 100-C and 100-K contactors
1 N.O./1 N.C. Auxiliary Contact—late make N.O., early break N.C.
 Provides capability for dropping out contactor before breaking current on fuses
 Late make N.O. contact provides positive indication that power circuit is open
Products
•
140F Fuse Holders
Certifications
•
IEC, CE Mark, UL, CSA
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 51 of 143
9.4
Industrial Din Rail Circuit Breakers
9.4.1
UL 489 Circuit Breakers: 1489-A
Bulletin 1489-A Industrial DIN Rail Circuit Breakers are listed for branch circuit
applications in the United States and Canada and approved as miniature circuit
breakers for IEC applications. We have a variety of configurations with current
ranges of 0.5…40 A and voltage ranges of 240V AC and 480Y/277V AC.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/Circuit-Breakers/1489-Industrial-DIN-Rail
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Energy-limiting design protects downstream during short circuits
Field-mountable options for selective applications
IP2x finger-protection (front)
Trip-free mechanism (breaker operation cannot be defeated by holding the handle in the ON
position)
Time delay (D characteristic) for high inrush currents during inductive start-ups
Mounts on DIN rail
Wire connect, line and load (reversible)
Optional terminals for ring lug terminals
Products
•
1489-A Industrial DIN Rail Circuit Breakers
Certifications
•
UL, CSA
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your Industrial DIN Rail Circuit Breakers, including:
•
•
•
•
Auxiliary/signal contacts
Bus bars
Lockout attachment
Shunt trip modules
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/471158/1213081/5725120/tab5.html
9.4.2
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: 1489-M
Bulletin 1489-M Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breakers are UL 489 Listed for branch
circuit protection in the United States and Canada, and they are certified as
Miniature Circuit Breakers for IEC applications. These circuit breakers are
compatible with many accessories to meet diverse application needs, including
UL 508 Listed bus bars for convenience in panel assembly, auxiliary contacts,
signal contacts and shunt trips for versatility, lockout attachments for safety
during maintenance, ideal for extreme ambient conditions, feature fast breaking
time, and superior shock and vibration resistance.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/Circuit-Breakers/1489-Thermal-Magnetic
Features
•
•
•
•
Includes 0.5…63 A miniature circuit breakers
Available in 1-, 2- and 3-pole versions
Provides C and D trip curves
Current limiting
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 52 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Offers dual terminals for wiring and bus bar flexibility
Includes reversible line and load connections
Dual terminals allow a more secure connection of two wires, or both a wire and bus bar
Terminal design helps prevent wiring misses by directing wires into the terminal openings, even
while tightening
Fast breaking time
High rated voltage
Superior shock and vibration resistance to help prevent nuisance tripping
Single and multi-pole toggle mount lock out attachments available for Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
Fully recyclable device
Suitable for extreme ambient conditions
Products
•
1489-M Thermal-magnetic Miniature Circuit Breakers
Certifications
•
UL Listed, CSA Certified, CE Marked, VDE Certified, CCC Certified, RoHS Compliant
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 1489-M Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, including:
•
•
•
•
Auxiliary contacts
Shunt trips
Signal contacts
Toggle mount
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/471158/1213081/5725120/Accessories.html
9.5
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
**** Note: Bulletin 140G family of molded case circuit breakers replaces the
Bulletin 140U family of molded case circuit breakers frames . ****
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Engineering Assistant Tool — This tool provides
cross-reference details, CAD drawings, installation instructions, and trip
curves to support your migration from our Bulletin 140U to our Bulletin 140G
Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/ocx.aspx?sdrsid=S16016#
9.5.1
Molded Case Circuit Breaker: 140G
Bulletin 140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers have eight different frame sizes with a range of 10...3000 A
to accommodate your required current ratings and breaking capacities. With a wide range of operators
and accessories, these circuit breakers provide the protection of circuits against overload, short circuit,
and ground fault.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/Circuit-Breakers/140G-Circuit-Breakers
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Offers 3- and 4-pole versions to support worldwide application
Includes high interrupting ratings in compact dimensions from 18...100 kA
Improved Short Circuit Coordination (G and I Frames now have Type 2 Coordination)
New technology enables quicker clearing of higher level faults, at higher voltages than the 140U
Offers a wide range of operating mechanisms to fit a variety of panel configurations
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 53 of 143
•
•
•
•
Provides greater customization in trip units
Offers a wide range of accessories for global availability (Field Installed)
More termination options
Includes globally rated and RoHS compliant
Products
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, G-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, H-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, I-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, J-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, K-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, M-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, N-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, NS-Frame
140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, R-Frame
Certifications
CE Marked, CSA Certified, UL Listed, CCC
Selection
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/sg/140g-sg001_-en-p.pdf
Accessories
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/305540/12391079/Accessories.html
9.6
Electronic Circuit Protection
9.6.1
Electronic Circuit Protection: 1692
Bulletin 1692 Electronic Circuit Protection Modules protect the secondary
circuits of 24V DC switched mode power supplies. These modules monitor both
supply voltage and load currents, and you can monitor and control the modules both locally and
remotely.
Designed for 24VDC circuits, the 1692 provides comprehensive protection against short circuit and
overcurrent conditions while allowing for inrush current.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/1692-Electronic-Circuit-Protection-Module
Explore this interactive demonstration to compare the performance of Bulletin 1692 Electronic Circuit
Protection modules to thermo-magnetic circuit breakers in various fault scenarios on a control circuit.
Learn how electronic circuit protection can help you more effectively protect your devices against short
circuits and overloads, as well as avoid nuisance tripping.
On-Line Demo:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/resources/downloads/rockwellautomation/multimedia/productstechnologies/circuit-and-load-protection/electronic-circuit-protection/index.html
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Allows less "let-through" energy than non-limiting circuit breakers
Uses output circuit indicators to indicate the presence of affected circuits for rapid troubleshooting
and correction
Provides ON/OFF and reset buttons
Offers certified Class 2 circuits (on select devices only)
DIN Rail mountable
Input voltage monitoring
Current monitoring and limitations of the 4 outputs
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 54 of 143
•
Fast tripping
Products
•
•
1692-ZG Electronic Circuit Protection Modules
1692-ZRCLSS NEC Class 2 Electronic Circuit Protection Modules
Certifications
•
9.7
UL, NEC Class 2 (on select devices only), CE
Residual Current Device
9.7.1
Residual Current Devices: 1492-RCDA
Bulletin 1492-RCDA Residual Current Devices detect and interrupt leakage to the
ground, helping you prevent injury to exposed personnel and damage to
equipment. Use these devices with miniature circuit breakers for additional circuit
protection from overload, short circuit, and ground fault.
RCDs are used in series with miniature circuit breakers for additional circuit protection from not only
overload and short circuit, but also ground fault. Many short circuits begin as undetected ground faults.
Using an RCD in an application may detect problems before costly equipment damage and downtime
occurs.
These devices are Type A Residual Current Devices to IEC Standards.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/Circuit-Breakers/1492-Residual-CurrentDevices
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Provides 25…80 A residual current devices
Includes 2- and 4-pole versions
Includes 30 mA sensitivity devices for personnel protection
Includes 100, 300 and 500 mA sensitivity devices for equipment protection
Offers reversible line and load connections
Provides protection against current leakage to ground (earth) caused by an insulation loss between a
live conductor and an exposed conductive part (such as an abraded wire, or a grounded person
touching the live conductor)
Suitable for protection against AC and pulsating DC (rectified AC) earth leakage current
Dual terminals allow a more secure connection of two wires, or both a wire and bus bar
Products
•
1492-RCDA Residual Current Devices
Certifications
•
cURus Recognized, CE Marked, CCC Certified, VDE Certified, RoHS Compliant
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 1492-RCDA Residual Current Devices, including:
•
•
Auxiliary contacts
Bus bars
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/471158/3282061/Accessories.html
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 55 of 143
9.8
Overload Relays
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/2051089/6270353/6647239/5920799/5922015/
9.8.1
Thermal Overload Relays
9.8.1.1
IEC Bi-Metallic Overload Relays: 193-T1
Bulletin 193-T1 IEC Bimetallic Overload Relays are designed for use with
Bulletin 100-C Contactors and Bulletin 104-C Reversing Contactors.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/MotorProtection/193CT-193T1-Overload-Relay
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Phase-loss protection
Ambient temperature compensation
Trip class 10/10A
Auxiliary contacts (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.)
Test function for auxiliary contacts
Manual/automatic reset mode
Trip indicator
Optional remote reset solenoid and external reset accessories
Available only in IEC configurations
Products
•
193-T1 Overload Relays
Certifications
•
cULus, CE marked
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 193-T1 Bimetallic Standard Overload Relays, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adapters
External reset buttons
Label sheets
Marking tag sheets
Remote reset solenoids
Reset adapters and rods
Transparent covers
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229467/8540208/Product-Selection.html
9.8.1.2
IEC Miniature Bi-Metallic Overload Relays: 193-K
Bulletin 193-K IEC Mininature Bimetallic Overload Relays are designed for use
with Bulletin 100-K Contactors and Bulletin 104-K Reversing Contactors.
These thermal overload relays include a differential mechanism for sensitivity
to phase-loss conditions.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/MotorProtection/193K-Overload-Relay
Features
•
•
Standard protection for AC and DC motors
Phase-loss sensitivity
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 56 of 143
•
•
•
•
Ambient temperature compensation
Trip class 10A
Auxiliary switches (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.)
Available only in IEC configurations
Products
•
193-K Bimetallic Overload Relays
Certifications
•
CE marked, cULus Listed
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 193-K Bimetallic Miniature Overload Relays, including:
•
•
•
•
External reset buttons
Overload relays
Remote reset solenoids
Reset adapters
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229467/8339426/Product-Selection.html
9.8.2
Electronic Overload Relays
9.8.2.1
Electronic Overload Relays: E300
Bulletin 193 and 592 E300™ Electronic Overload Relays offer a modular
design, communications options, simplified wiring, and Logix integration.
The E300 overload relays provide flexibility to reduce engineering time
and maximize uptime for motor control in an automation system.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/MotorProtection/E300-Overload-Relays
Features
•
•
•
•
Modular design for exact application needs
Simplified Logix Integration
Simplified wiring between overload relay and 100-C contactor
Dual port EtherNet/IP
Products
•
Customize the E300™ Overload Relay by selecting one each of the following modules:



193-ECM E300 Communication Module
193-EIO E300 Control Module
193-ESM or 592-ESM E300 Sensing Module
Certifications
•
CE, cULus Listed, C-Tick
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your E300™ Solid-state Overload Relays, including:
•
•
•
•
•
Bus cables
Control operator station
Digital I/O (24V DC, 120V AC, 240V AC)
Power supply (120/240V AC, 24V DC)
Replacement connectors
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 57 of 143
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229467/12368361/ProductSelection.html
9.8.2.2
Electronic Overload Relays: E1 Plus
Bulletin 193 IEC and 592 NEMA E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relays are
accurate and reliable. They are durable, flexible to fit most applications,
and easy to install. Through optional side-mount modules, you can
expand communication and protection.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/MotorProtection/E1-Plus-Overload-Relays
Current measurement-based protection
While electromechanical overload relays pass motor current through heating elements to provide an
indirect simulation of motor heating, the E1 Plus Overload Relay directly measures motor current.
Current measurement-based overload protection more accurately models a motor’s thermal
condition. Furthermore, ambient temperature does not impact the performance of current
measurement-based designs over the specified temperature operating range.
Electronic design
Thermal modeling is performed electronically with precision solid-state components, where at the
heart of the E1 Plus Overload Relay is an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC). The ASIC
continually processes motor current data to accurately maintain the time-current status of the motor
thermal capacity utilization value.
Thermal memory
A thermal memory circuit allows the E1 Plus Overload Relay to model the heating and cooling
effects of motor on and off periods. This ensures accurate protection for both hot and cold motors.
Enhanced phase loss protection
A separate phase loss detection circuit incorporated into the E1 Plus Overload Relay allows it to
respond quickly to phase loss conditions; typical reaction time is 3 seconds.
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Self-powered
Phase-loss protection
Wide current adjustment range (5:1)
Enhanced protection modules available
EtherNet/IP™ and DeviceNet™ communication options available
E1 Plus Solid-State Overload Relays
•
•
•
•
•
Over-molded power connections
1 N.O. and 1 N.C. isolated auxiliary contacts (B600 Rated)
Low energy consumption (150 mW)
Ambient temperature compensation
Visible trip indication
193-ED version offers:
• 0.1…45 A current range
• Fixed Trip Class 10
• Manual reset
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 58 of 143
193-EE version offers:
• 0.1…800 A current range
• Selectable Trip Class (10, 15, 20, or 30)
• Selectable manual/auto-manual reset
• Single- and three-phase devices
Products
•
193 IEC and 592 NEMA E1 Plus Solid-state Overload Relays
Certifications
•
•
IEC: CE, cULus Listed, C-Tick, CCC
NEMA: cULus Listed
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your E1 Plus Solid-state Overload Relays, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Core balanced ground fault sensors
Current adjustment shields
DeviceNet™ configuration terminals
DIN rail/panel adapters
External reset adapters and reset buttons
Remote reset solenoids
Side-mount expansion modules
Terminal covers and lugs
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229467/2442188/Product-Overview.html
10 Relays & Contactors
10.1 Relays
10.1.1 Control Relays: 700-P
The Bulletin 700-P family of relays has 4 types of contact cartridges. Different
cartridges can be combined into one relay to yield a custom-tailored application
solution. Time delay, latching attachments, overlapping and logic reed contacts
are available.
Bulletin 700-P relays use standard (10A) contact cartridges with a double-break and bifurcated design.
These relays are supplied with a max. of 12 contacts (max. 8 N.C.).
Bulletin 700-PK master control relays contain (20A) master contact cartridges with large single-contact
pads on each side of the spanner for twice the current rating to control heavy loads and for master
control of a system. These relays are supplied with a max. of 12 contacts (max. 8 N.C.). Time delay and
latching attachments are available.
Bulletin 700-P and -PK relays combine convertible contacts with Direct Drive, a construction designed to
maintain non-overlap operation between N.O. and N.C. contacts (within published ratings).
Bulletin 700-PH relays contain (35A) tandem contact cartridges. A jumper kit (Cat No. 700-CPH) allows
two (20A) master contact cartridges to be connected in parallel. A maximum of six poles are supplied, up
to four of which can be normally closed. Time delay and latch attachments are available.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/NEMA-Heavy-Duty-Relays
Features
•
Rugged construction
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 59 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NEMA and IEC ratings, 600V maximum AC/DC
Accessories include: adder decks, time delay, latching, surge suppressors, mounting strip
For machine tool and other heavy-duty applications
Can accommodate ring tongue terminals
Integral DIN Rail adapter on AC relays
Finger-safe protection standard
Expands Safety Relay Outputs
Products
700-P NEMA Heavy-duty Relays
•
•
Standard contact cartridges (10 A) with a double-break and bifurcated design
Up to 12 poles, convertible to N.O. or N.C. (8 N.C. maximum)
700-PH NEMA Heavy-duty Relays
•
•
Tandem contact cartridges (35 A)
Up to 6 poles, convertible to N.O. or N.C. (4 N.C. maximum)
700-PK NEMA Heavy-duty Relays
•
•
Master contact cartridges (20 A)
Up to 12 poles, convertible to N.O. or N.C. (8 N.C. maximum)
Certifications
•
cULus Listed, ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) certified
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 700-P Heavy-Duty Relays, including:
• Adder decks
• Contact cartridges
• Finger-safe cover accessories
• Mechanical latch units
• Relay rails
• Remote potentiometers
• Pneumatic time-delay units
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229266/229661/3087128/229735/Introduction.html
10.1.2 Control Relays: 700-CF, 700S-CF
The Bulletin 700-CF range of 4-pole relays is also available in an 8-pole safety
version (700S-CF)
Mechanically linked contacts: Allows detection of a welded contact condition.
Mechanically linked contacts prevent the reclosing of the N.C. contacts if a N.O.
contact has welded.
Double-Break Contacts: Has greater DC load breaking capability and better
isolation. It provides separation of N.O. and N.C. circuits, unlike standard “Form C”
contacts. Double-break contacts open the circuit in two places, creating two air
gaps.
Bulletin 700S-CF Safety Control Relays provide mechanically or mirror contact
performance, which are required in feedback circuits for safety applications. Bifurcated contacts are ideal
for low energy feedback safety circuits where high contact reliability is required.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/IEC-Industrial-Relays
Additional Features and Options
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 60 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coil voltages from 12…600Vac and 6…600Vdc
Switch from 5…600Vac and Vdc, Switch from 1mA… 35A
Front and Side Mounted Auxiliary contacts
Solid State Pneumatic Timing Modules
Common accessories with Bulletin 100-C contactors
IEC 947-5-1, EN 50011, EN 5005, EN 50022, UL508, VDE 0660, CSA C22.2 Part 14
CE, CSA, UL listed (File E14840, Guide NKCR), SUVA
Safety Applications
•
•
•
Safety relay output – to expand the current rating or contact life of a safety relays
Master Control Relays (switching PLC power supplies)
E-STOP relays, Light curtain monitoring, Press control
Products
700-CF
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229266/229661/3087130/229731/ProductSelection.html
700S-CF
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229266/229661/3087130/229737/ProductSelection.html
10.1.3 Solid State Miniature Square Base Relays: 700-HC
Bulletin 700-HC Miniature Square Base Relays are 4-pole plug-in relays for your
low-energy switching applications.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Miniature-Ice-Cube-Relays
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Blade-style terminals
7 or 10 A contact ratings
Standard ON/OFF flag indicator
Electrical schematic on faceplate, clear cover for visual inspection
Incorporated manual override lever (-3 option) with the existing push-to-test button
Optional lighted status indicator, push-to-test and manual override
Products
•
700-HC Miniature Square Base Relays
Certifications
•
cULus, CE, ABS, IMQ, RINA
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 700-HC Miniature Ice Cube Relays, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
DIN (#3) Symmetrical Hat Rails
Identification Tags
Retainer Clips
Screw Terminal Sockets
Surge Suppressors
Timing Modules
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229266/229643/229699/Product-Selection.html
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 61 of 143
10.1.4 Miniature Square Base Relay: 700-HF
Bulletin 700-HF Miniature Square Base Relays are ideal for automotive
applications.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Miniature-Square-BaseRelays
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Blade-style terminals
2-pole, 3-pole, 4-pole
10 A contact rating
DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT
Plug-in quick connect solder terminals
Optional lighted status indicator, push-to-test operator
Products
•
700-HF Miniature Square Base Relays
Certifications
•
UL, CSA, CE
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 700-HF Miniature Square Base Relays, including:
•
•
•
•
DIN (#3) Symmetrical Hat Rails
Identification Tags
Retainer Clips
Screw Terminal Sockets
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229266/229643/229689/Product-Selection.html
10.1.5 Solid State Square Base Relay: 700-HB
Bulletin 700-HB Square Base Relays are designed for HVAC, elevator, and
automotive industry applications. Two types of sockets are available; the IEC
closed terminal version and the NEMA open terminal version.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Square-Base-Relays
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Blade-style terminals
DPDT or 3PDT
15 A, B300 contact rating
Standard ON/OFF flag indicator
Optional lighted status indicator, push-to-test and manual override
Products
•
700-HB Square Base Relays
Certifications
•
cULus, CE, ABS, IMQ, RINA
Accessories
We offer a range of accessories that complement your 700-HB Square Base Relays, including:
•
•
•
DIN (#3) Symmetrical Hat Rails
Identification Tags
Retainer Clips
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 62 of 143
•
•
•
Screw Terminal Sockets
Surge Suppressors
Timing Modules
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229266/229643/229693/Product-Selection.html
10.1.6 Ice-Cube Solid-State Relays: 700-SC
Bulletin 700-SC Ice Cube Solid-state Relays are miniature, socketed relays rated to
3 A load output current.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Relays-and-Timers/Ice-Cube-Solid-State-Relays
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 A (resistive) max. continuous load output current
264V AC, 48V DC or 125V DC max. load voltage options
5…24V DC or 110/220V AC control input voltage options
Optional lighted status indicator for input/logic On/Off monitoring
700-HN103, 700-HN104, or 700-HN128 socket compatible
700-AT1 or 700-AT2 timer module compatible
Products
•
700-SC Ice Cube Solid-State Relays
Certifications
•
cURus Recognized, CE Marked, VDE Certified
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your 700-SC Ice Cube Relays, including:
•
•
•
•
Identification tags
Retainer clip
Screw terminal sockets
Timing module
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229266/229641/229681/Product-Selection.html
Protective Component: When controlling AC inductive loads, connect an inrush/surge absorbing
device (varistor) across the SSR load terminals. If the SSR has built-in surge suppression (Bulletins 700SE and 700-SH) and additional surge suppression is required, connect the varistor across the terminals
of the load device . Select a varistor that meets the conditions of the load voltage outlined in the table
below. Note: For additional details applying solid-state relays, refer to pub. Number 700-AT001A-EN-E,
"Solid-State Relay Application Guide. "Document available at:
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/public/documents/webassets/browse_category.hcst
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 63 of 143
10.2 Contactors
10.2.1 General Contactors: 100-C, 104-C, 100-D, 104-D, 100-G
We offer a full line of versatile IEC contactors. The Bulletin 100-C offers spacesaving design in a standard contactor, and the Bulletin 100-D has flexibility with
an integrated PLC interface. Bulletin 100-G contactor family provides an
essential expansion to the Bulletin 100 contactor range through 1200 A (AC3)
and 1350 A (AC1).
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/IEC-Contactors/IEC-StandardContactors
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Meets IEC, UL, and CSA standards requirements
Common accessories for all contactor sizes
Reversible coil terminations (line or load side)
IP2X finger protection
RoHs compliant
Built-in surge suppression
Products
100-C/104-C IEC Contactors
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229461/229481/tab3.html
•
•
•
•
•
•
4...55 kW
5...75 Hp (9...97 A)
Front and side mounting of auxiliary contacts
Electronic and pneumatic timing modules
Space-saving coil-mounted control modules
Reversible coil terminations (line or load side)
100-D/104-D IEC Contactors
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229461/494416/tab3.html
•
•
•
•
•
63...500 kW @ 400V
75...600 Hp @ 460V
100...700 Hp @ 575V
Integrated PLC interface
Low power pick-up & hold-in
100-G IEC Contactors
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/229461/366304/tab3.html
•
•
•
•
315...710 kW, 400V
350...900 Hp, 460/575V
Horizontal and vertical interlocking
Mechanical latching
Certifications
•
CE marked, cULus Listed, SUVA Certified
Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for your IEC Standard Contactors.
Bulletin 100-C/104-C IEC Contactors
•
Assembly components
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 64 of 143
•
•
•
•
Auxiliary contacts
Control modules
Marking systems
Terminal kits
Bulletin 100-D IEC Contactors
•
•
•
•
•
Auxiliary contacts
Connecting components
Interlocks
Marking systems
Supressor modules
Bulletin 100-G IEC Contactors
•
•
•
Contact blocks
Mechanical latch
Switching poles
10.2.2 Lighting Contactor: 100L
Bulletin 100L Lighting Contactors control a variety of lighting loads. Use them
for all popular lighting loads and other non-motor applications including
tungsten filament lighting loads, electric discharge (fluorescent) loads, electric
furnaces, and electric water heaters. In addition, these contactors meet the
requirements of both CSA and UL.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Lighting-Control/Multi-Pole-LightingContactors/Bulletin-100L
Features
•
•
•
•
Electrically held
20 A rating
4-, 8-, and 12-pole configurations
Open or enclosed
Products
•
100L Multi-pole Lighting Contactors, IEC
Certifications
•
cULus Listed, CE Marked
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/6890817/6890955/229483/tab3.html
100LC20abc
Lighting Contactors
a = N (Open), A (IP42 Type 1), F (IP66 Type 3/4/12)
b = J (24V), D (120V), H (208V), L (220V), A (240V),
B (480V), C (600V)
c = Number of poles (4, 8 or 12)
10.3 Mounting System 141A
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A,
supplement SB for Short Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
The Bulletin 141A Mounting System provides several different mounting solutions
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 65 of 143
for IEC loadfeeders. Factory-assembled Bulletin 103 Non-Reversing and Bulletin 107 Reversing starters are
available from Allen-Bradley for these mounting solutions. Also provided with the 141A Mounting System are
preconfigured Circuit Breaker Modules utilizing the new Bulletin 140U Molded Case Circuit Breakers for
feeding and protecting a Busbar system. 141 MCS mounting systems meet UL508A for feeder circuit
spacings.
11 Disconnects
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A, supplement SB for Short Circuit
Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
11.1 IEC Rotary Disconnect Switches – 194R
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/Disconnect-Switches/IEC-Rotary-Disconnect-Switches
•
•
•
•
•
30 and 60 amp sizes: Internal handle with interlock mechanism
with integrated back-plate which aligns with 194R disconnect
switch mounting holes for quick and easy drop-in installation.
NFPA 79 internal test mode handle:
Interlock mechanism also has lock-out capability to padlock
disconnect in off-condition
All use standard 194R handles and shafts for standard
operation
NFPA 79 2002 compliant providing a means to operate the switch in an open enclosure (without the use
of accessory tools or devices, i.e. wrench or vicegrips) and providing an interlocking means to prevent
closing the switch unless an interlock is operated by deliberate action.
Features
• Pre-assembled options
• Robust handle design made from metal, not plastic
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 66 of 143
•
•
•
On-hand operation
Improved form and fit with a more comfortable grip
Various ranges and sizes
Products
194R Fused Disconnect Switches
• 20...1250 A IEC
• 20…800 A UL
• Touch-safe design
• OSHA padlocking
• Front or side external operation
• Double-break switching for full fuse line and load side isolation when switch is OFF
• Uses Bulletin 800F auxilliary contact blocks to help you reduce inventory
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/3170947/3224914/tab3.html
194R Non-fused Disconnect Switches
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20...1250 A IEC
20…800 A UL
High performance
Compact design
Universal IEC/UL switch body
Severe utilization categories (AC-22 and AC-23)
High resistance to humidity
194R-FC Cable-operated Handle
•
•
•
•
•
•
30 A size
Fused switch version certifications: UL Class J, UL Class CC
Uses Bulletin 1494F handles: IP66 (Type 3R, 3, 12, 4, 4X)
Pre-assembled cable-operated disconnect with interlock
Cable options range from 3...10 feet
Compliant with NFPA 2002
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/3170947/1263912/tab3.html
194R-S Side-mounted Kit
•
•
•
•
30...60 A sizes
Fused switch version certifications: UL Class J, UL Class CC
Operating handle ingress ratings: IP66 (Type 3R, 3, 12, 4, 4X)
Pre-assembled, side-mounting bracketed disconnect interlock
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229254/3170947/1307638/tab3.html
Certifications
•
UL Listed, CSA Certified, CEASTA Certified, LOVAG Certified
11.2 Variable-Depth, Flange Mounted Disconnect Switch – 1494V
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/Disconnect-Switches/NEMA-RotaryDisconnect-Switches#/tab2
The Allen Bradley Bulletin 1494V offering includes integral disconnect switches and
mechanisms for right flange installation and for left flange installation. They are designed
for exceptionally long life (over 20,000 operations). New lower profile design maximizes
panel space. Handle template provided with each device ensures proper operation and
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 67 of 143
adjustment of the handle connecting rod and disconnect switch. Switch, mechanism, and handle are always
connected, even when the enclosure door is open.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available in switch ratings 30A…100A
Non-fusible or Fusible (Class H, J, R)
NFPA 79 Compliant
Highly visible switch blade
Line side shield, where power is typically present
Protective Covers for fuses and load wires
Color coded handle provides visual status
Components include Disconnect Switch, Connecting Rods, Operating
Handles, Trailer Fuse Block Kits, and Fuse Clip Kits.
Accessories include Auxiliary Contacts, Protective Fuse Covers,
Electrical Interlocks, Channel Support Kit, and Lug Connectors.
Field installed Kit Options available
11.3 IEC Load Switches – 194E
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/194E-Load-Switches
The Bulletin 194 Load Switches are suitable for At-Motor Disconnect Switch
•
•
•
•
IP66/UL Type Operating Handles
IP2LX Finger Safe terminals
Positive Guided Actuation
Padlockable
11.4 NEMA enclosed Safety Disconnects - 1494G:
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229248/3178789/8266384/3178795/
The 140U-G Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers are available in 2 and 3 pole versions,
meeting the market needs for lower cost and functionality molded case circuit breakers.
These thermal magnetic circuit breakers are deal for use on applications of 480V or less.
Global Approvals & Certifications
•
•
•
UL489
HACR
CSA C22.2
Current Ranges
•
•
Up to 100A on the 3 poles
Up to 50A on the 2 poles
Field Accessories
•
•
•
•
Locking attachments
DIN rail mounting adapters
Multi-tap terminal lugs
Variable depth rotary operating mechanism
Factory Installed Options
•
•
Auxiliary contacts for the 2 pole
Auxiliary contacts and a shunt plate
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 68 of 143
12 Transformers – 1497
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Control-Transformers
The Allen Bradley transformer product portfolio provides:
•
•
•
•
•
RoHS compliant products
Indoor/outdoor general purpose transformers
Small compact designs
Single, dual and multi-tap voltages
CE compliant products
12.1 Control Circuit Transformers – 1497
Bulletin 1497 offers single, dual, and multi-tap primary voltages. These versatile multi-tap
transformers allow reduced control power from a variety of voltage sources to meet a wide array
of applications.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
63…2000 VA (50 and/or 60 Hz)
Single phase
Epoxy encapsulated
EN 60-529 finger-safe protection
IP2X finger-safe terminals
Fuse cover, for added protection,
available as an optional feature
Includes four (4) control wires and one
ground wire
•
•
•
•
RoHS Compliant
IEC, EN 61558
NEMA, ICS2-1993, Port 1 Sect
9.2
UL 506, For Class IOS Transformers
CE
cULus
TÜV Rheinland
12.2 Machine Tool Transformers – 1497A
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Machine-Tool-Transformer
Bulletin 1497A Machine Tool Transformers (50/60 Hz) are designed to reduce supply
voltages to control circuits. The complete line of transformers is available with optional
factory-installed or panel-mount primary and secondary fuse block/clip.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
50…3000 VA (50/60 Hz)
RoHS Compliant
Single phase
Epoxy encapsulated
C22.2 No. 66
UL 506
cULus
12.3 Control Power Transformers – 1497B
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Control-Power-Transformer
Bulletin 1497B Control Power Transformers are designed to reduce supply voltages to
control circuits. The complete line of transformers is available with optional factory-installed
or panel-mount primary and secondary fuse block.
•
•
•
•
50…3000 VA (60 Hz)
RoHS compliant
Single phase
Epoxy encapsulated
12.4 General Purpose Transformers – 1497D
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/General-Purpose-Transformer
Bulletin 1497D General Purpose Transformers are generally used for supplying appliance
lighting, motorized machine, and power loads from electrical distribution systems.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 69 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0.050…25.0 kVA (60 & 50/60 Hz)
Indoor/outdoor non-ventilated enclosure
Single phase
Resin encapsulated
Exceeds requirements of the Uniform Building Code (UBC) and California
Code Title 24
Copper windings provided for all transformers rated 2 kVA and below.
Aluminum windings provided for all transformers rated 3 kVA and above.
NEMA Type 3R rated enclosures
13 Power Supplies
Bulletin 1606 switched mode power supplies includes four product families that meet most worldwide single
and three-phase application requirements. These units are designed and manufactured to accept wide ranges
of both AC and DC input voltages and are tested to meet global safety standards.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Switched-Mode-Power-Supplies
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Quick mounting and connecting, innovative DIN-Rail mount, smallest in class
UL Listed NEC Class 2; Class 1, Div. 2; Semi F47; ODVA Approved
Low inrush current limiting
PFC Active or Passive
Wide range input; auto select input
Superior overload design (continuous current, no hiccup)
NEC Class 2 'Limited Power' options
Selectable operating mode (single/parallel)
Superior efficiency and temperature rating
Special Modules
• Brownout buffer, DC to DC converter, N+1 redundancy, DC UPS
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/1151309/1151313/Introduction.html
13.1 Power Supply – 1606-XL
Bulletin 1606-XL Standard Switched Mode Power Supplies enhance the safety
and reliability of your industrial applications. The wide power range and feature
set supports most application demands. This line carries CE, cULus, and cURus
approvals to meet the most stringent EMC standards.Reserve Power and Load
Response
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Standard-Switched-ModePower-Supplies
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Rated outputs between 60…960 W (2.5…40 A at 24V DC)
Multiple output voltages available
Multiple single and three-phase inputs available for global applications
Buffer modules provide a short boost function, buffering load currents during typical main faults,
switching events or load peaks
Redundancy modules provide a means for managing dual power supplies for back-up power
Products
•
1606-XL Standard Switched Mode Power Supplies
Certifications
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 70 of 143
•
CE, UL508 (cULus Listed), UL1950 (cURus), Safety standards = IEC/EN 60950, EN 50178, EMC
standards = EN 55011 (Class B), EN 55022 (Class B), EN 61000-6-2, EMC standards = EN 61000-32 (A14), EN 50081-1
Accessories
•
•
•
•
Batteries
Battery brackets
Battery assemblies with bracket
Back-of-panel brackets
13.2 Power Supply: 1606-XLE
Bulletin 1606-XLE Essential Switched Mode Power Supplies have a simple design and
offer high performing, ultra slim models with the most basic feature set. These products
contain the essential features for long service life and high reliability. This line is ideal if
you are interested in a cost-effective solution to power your operations.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Essential-Switched-Mode-PowerSupply
Features
• Rated outputs between 80…960 W (3.3…40 A at 24V DC)
• Multiple single and three-phase inputs available for global applications
• Cost-effective solution for single-phase applications
• Redundancy modules provide a means for managing dual power supplies for
back-up power
Products
•
1606-XLE Essential Switched Mode Power Supply
Certifications
•
CE, UL508 (cULus Listed), UL1950 (cURus), Safety standards = IEC/EN 60950,
EN 50178, EMC standards = EN 55011 (Class B), EN 55022 (Class B), EN
61000-6-2, EMC standards = EN 61000-3-2 (A14), EN 50081-1
Accessories
•
•
•
•
Batteries
Battery brackets
Battery assemblies with bracket
Back-of-panel brackets
13.3 Power Supply: 1606-XLP
Bulletin 1606-XLP Compact Switched Mode Power Supplies are an excellent
choice when saving critical space is one of your main objectives. These devices
are equipped with many of the same features and certifications as the XL
devices and support low-power applications.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Compact-Switched-ModePower-Supplies
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Rated outputs between 15…100 W (0.6…4.2 A at 24V DC)
Multiple output voltages available
Multiple single and three-phase inputs available for global applications
Smaller, cost-effective solution for low power applications
Redundancy modules provide a means for managing dual power suppliesfor back-up power
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 71 of 143
Products
•
1606-XLP Compact Switched Mode Power Supplies
Certifications
•
CE, UL508 (cULus Listed), UL1950 (cURus), Safety standards = IEC/EN 60950, EN 50178, EMC
standards = EN 55011 (Class B), EN 55022 (Class B), EN 61000-6-2, EMC standards = EN 61000-32 (A14), EN 50081-1
Accessories
•
•
•
•
Batteries
Battery brackets
Battery assemblies with bracket
Back-of-panel brackets
13.4 Power Supply: 1606-XLS
Bulletin 1606-XLS Performance Switched Mode Power Supplies use a
technology that significantly reduces unit size yet delivers a 150% power boost.
Sleek and compact, these highly efficient devices have enough reserve current
available to start even your most stubborn loads.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Performance-Switched-ModePower-Supplies
The 1606-XLS design features the smallest per watt profile in the world.
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rated outputs between 80…960 W (3.3...40 A at 24V DC)
150% power boost feature handles start-up loads
Multiple single and three-phase inputs available for global applications
Small size for panel space savings
Buffer modules provide a short boost function, buffering load currents
during typical main faults, switching events or load peaks
Redundancy modules provide a means for managing dual power
suppliesfor back-up power
Products
•
1606-XLS Performance Switched Mode Power Supplies
Certifications
•
CE, UL508 (cULus Listed), UL1950 (cURus), Safety standards =
IEC/EN 60950, EN 50178, EMC standards = EN 55011 (Class B), EN
55022 (Class B), EN 61000-6-2, EMC standards = EN 61000-3-2 (A14),
EN 50081-1
Accessories
•
•
•
•
Batteries
Battery brackets
Battery assemblies with bracket
Back-of-panel brackets
13.5 ArmorPower Supply - 1607-XT
Bulletin 1607-XT ArmorPower™ On-Machine™ Power Supplies are for applications
where voltage drop occurs due to line loss, and where compact size, high
efficiency, and reliability are critical. Available in 50...200 W models, these IP67rated power supplies address a trend of eliminating traditional enclosure for onmachine and factory floor installations. These power supplies are vacuum
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 72 of 143
encapsulated to provide maximum resistance to shock, vibration, and humidity.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/ArmorPower-On-Machine
Features
•
•
•
•
IP67 and NEC Class 2 ratings
Vacuum encapsulation technology
Quick connectors
Smooth surface, suitable for washdown
Products
•
1607-XT ArmorPower™ On-Machine™ Power Supplies
Certifications
•
UL Listed, cURus Recognized, CE Marked
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cordsets
Patchcords
Terminal chambers
T-Ports
Panel mount receptacles
Input/Output devices
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/1151309/9446728/Product-Selection.html
13.6 Industrial Uninterruptible Power Supply: 1609-B, 1609-D
*** Note: Replaces 1609-U Family of UPS’s ***
The Bulletin 1609-B Industrial Uninterruptible Power Supplies feature the rugged industrial
design and performance of the 1609-D line, without the networking and expandable battery
features. They are DIN rail mountable or back-of-panel mountable and can handle
temperatures up to 50 °C (122 °F) with optional battery.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Uninterruptible-Power-Supplies/1609-B
Features
• DIN rail and panel/floor mount capabilities
• Hard-wired input/output connections
• Integrated remote on/off and dry contact I/O communication cables
• USB communication capabilities
• True sine wave AC output
Products
• 1609-B Industrial Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Certifications
• UL1778, CSA, EN/IEC62040-1, EMCFCC & CE (Class A), UL, cUL, FCC, CE
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/1151309/3720962/11635099/Introduction.html
___________________________________________________________________
______________
The Bulletin 1609-D family of Industrial Uninterruptible Power Supplies is designed for
industrial applications. These power supplies include remote control features and operate
inside control panels used in production environments.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Power-Supplies/Uninterruptible-Power-Supplies/1609-D
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 73 of 143
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Expandable battery capacity to extend run-time
EtherNet/IP™ communication capabilities
Includes software to allow remote monitoring and configuration
Hard-wired input/output connections
Integrated remote on/off and dry contact I/O communication cables
True sine wave AC output
Products
•
1609-D Industrial Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Certifications
•
UL1778, CSA, EN/IEC 62040-1, EMCFCC & CE (Class A), UL, cUL, FCC, CE
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/1151309/3720962/11637777/Introduction.html
13.7 Surge and Filter Protection — Bulletin 4983
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/8220195/
Noise is unwanted disturbance in your power line. Examples of noise sources are variable speed drives
and computerized industrial loads. Premature aging and system interference is common to equipment
without protection.
Transient and high frequency noise often go undetected until it is too late. It is not until equipment is
damaged that the importance of surge and filter protection is recognized. Planning your protection is less
problematic and can be less costly than reacting to a failure later. Be proactive and recognize the
importance of implementing surge and filter protection as part of your industrial environment.
14 IEC Terminal Blocks and Fuse Blocks
http://www.ab.com/industrialcontrols/products/terminal_blocks_and_wiring/
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A, supplement SB for Short Circuit
Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
14.1 Terminal Blocks
14.1.1 Screw Terminal Block Line – 1492-J
http://www.ab.com/industrialcontrols/products/terminal_blocks_and_wiring/iec/iec_screw.html
14.1.2 Spring-Clamp Terminal Blocks – 1492-L
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229268/3170951/2333073/
•
Feed-Through Blocks and Grounding Blocks for grounding a given circuit to the DIN Rail
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 74 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mini Blocks for applications where panel space is at a premium
Two-Level Blocks that double circuit wiring density
Multi-Conductor Blocks that allow splitting or joining of control circuits
Three-Level Sensor Blocks for coordination of three-wire sensor groups
Isolation Blocks for circuit isolation during testing and troubleshooting
Fuse Blocks, with and without blown fuse indication
Electrical Component Blocks that allow the insertion of fixed components
into control circuits. Available components include resistors, diodes, surge
suppression circuits, and shunt bars.
14.2 Fuse Blocks – 1491
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229248/2531077/
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A, supplement SB for Short Circuit
Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
Bulletin 1491 Fuse Blocks have been designed for general purpose applications. The bases of these blocks,
either phenolic or porcelain, are rugged in construction.
•
•
15
Available from 30…600 A
Class C, CC, H, J, and R Fuses
Power Terminal Blocks
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229268/471156/tab4.html
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A, supplement SB
for Short Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
15.1 Power Terminal Blocks – 1492-PD
•
•
•
•
Mini Blocks
3-Pole Power Distribution Blocks
Feed-Through/Splicer Blocks with
CE Marked
•
•
•
CSA Certified (File No. LR 19766, Class 605204)
UL Listed (File No. E40735, Guide No. XCFR2)
Flammability Ratings: 94V-O
15.2 Enclosed Power Distribution Terminal Blocks – 1492-PDE
The 1492-PDE Enclosed Power Distribution Terminal Blocks are designed to
prevent accidental contact with live connectors without the use of additional
barriers or shields. These panel mount devices have a compact footprint, and are
available with either aluminum or copper terminals. Captive termination screws
ensure that parts never get lost and the rugged polycarbonate housing will resist
physical damage. The single-pole devices are easily gangable to create multipole solutions.
•
•
•
UL recognized, CSA certified, CE compliant
Numerous connector configurations
IP20 from the front
•
•
Multi-pole assembly possible with easily
gangable units
Markers are available for easy terminal
identification
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 75 of 143
•
•
•
High fault SCCR up to 100 kA
1-pole devices with aluminum
connectors
175…510 A current range
•
or
110…600V AC/DC operating range
copper
15.3 Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks – 1492-PDL
•
•
•
•
•
16
UL1953 Listed Power Distribution Blocks
SCCR up to 100 kA
CE Compliant
Three pole devices
600V, up to 335A
Connection Systems
16.1 Mini-Style - 889N updated part numbers
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/connection-devices/mini-cordsets-and-patchcords
•
•
•
•
•
For Chrysler Powertrain, 9-pin overmolded connectors, One Piece molded body design
NEMA 4, 6P, 12, 13, IP67
1200 psi washdown
Heavy-duty STOOW 16 AWG cable
UL recognized and CSA certified
16.2 Micro-Style - 889D
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/3784140/10676228/4129860/6264953/6395200/tab2.html
•
•
•
•
•
4-pin and 5-pin DC Micro-style
Male or female connector types in straight or right angle versions
Optional stainless steel or nickel plated brass coupling nuts optional
IP67, NEMA 6P, 1200psi washdown rated
Molded oil resistant PUR material for cables
16.3 Pico-Style - 889P
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/3784140/10676228/4129860/6264953/6395200/tab7.html
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-pin configurations for Chrysler Powertrain
Straight or right angle versions.
Screw-on or snap-on style connectors
Nickel-plated brass Pico coupling nuts
IP67 rated for industrial environments
4-, 6-, 8-, 10-port distribution boxes
Compact size provides solutions for space limited applications
Available LED style connectors provide enunciation at the field device
Multiple thru-holes on distribution boxes provide ease of mounting
Insulation Displacement Connection field attachable connectors for virtually tool-free
installation
Patchcords, Y-cables, and splitters provide direct connection of Pico field devices to
DC Micro distribution boxes or I/O
Molded oil resistant PUR material for cables
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 76 of 143
16.4 DIN Valve Field Connectors and Cordets (new)
http://www.ab.com/connectionsystems/connectors/889din.html
889 DIN Valve Connectors
Recognizing the importance of flexibility and value in your control system, Rockwell Automation continues
to introduce new connection systems components that help make your installations simpler while
addressing the market’s ever-changing needs. From specialized safety connection systems to a full
complement of standard patchcordsand cordsets, Allen-Bradley connectivity products are rugged, costeffective solutions for a broad range of industrial applications. New Allen-Bradley DIN Valve cordsets and
field attachable connectors bring novel features and connectivity options to the On-Machine solution
provided by Rockwell Automation.
Available in a variety of sizes and wiring configurations, Allen-Bradley DIN valve connection systems
components simplify installation, modification and maintenance of your control system.
16.5 Distribution Boxes
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/6005557/6005561/10508501/
General Features:
•
•
•
•
•
IP67, NEMA 6P
Insulation
Displacement
Connectors
(IDC)
terminates
cables without stripping and
connecting individual leads to
screw terminals.
Multiple field devices can be wired
more efficiently in a consolidated
package
Quick disconnect main connectors
make wiring easy.
Troubleshooting is simplified with
LED output identification
16.5.1 DC Micro Connection Type – 898D
•
•
•
•
Yellow PET body offers good oil and chemical resistance
4, 6, or 8 DC micro connectors
LED version for use with PNP
IP67, NEMA 6P
16.5.2 Pico Connection Type – 898P
•
•
•
•
Grey Pocan body offers good oil and chemical resistance
Side and Top mounting holes
PUR cable
LED version for use with PNP
16.5.3 IDC Type – 898H
•
Yellow PET body offers good oil and chemical resistance
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 77 of 143
•
•
•
Insulation Displacement Connectors (IDC) terminates cables without stripping and connecting individual
leads to screw terminals.
PUR cable
LED version for use with PNP
16.6 EtherNet/IP Media
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/networks-and-communications/ethernet-ip-media
16.6.1 Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset
•
•
•
Over molded housing suitable for IP 67 applications
Flex rated
Twisted pair conductors allow for a reliable connection
16.6.2 Ethernet RJ45 cordset
• Flex rated and PVC cables for various applications
• Teal or red cable jacket
• Rugged strain relief and hitch mechanism to maintain network integrity
17
Ethernet Encoder
The 842E is an ultra-high resolution multiturn absolute encoder with EtherNet/IP interface,
dual-port embedded switch and DLR. These encoders provide 18-bit singleturn resolution
and 30-bit multi-turn
resolution. The EtherNet/IP encoder is targeted for high performance and reliability in
harsh industrial environments. Encoder includes an embedded EtherNet/IP switch to
connect additional E/IP capable product in series and/or support a Device Level Ring
(DLR) for ethernet media redundancy
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/3784140/10676228/4129858/6349953/11624044/Introduction.html
18
Power Products
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/Motor-Control-Centers
18.1 Intelligent Motor Control (Less than 600 Vac)
Intelligent Motor Control provides improved diagnostics and predictive failure information. They are also pretested and pre-configured systems. DeviceNet simplifies inter-wiring by replacing traditional hard-wiring
DeviceNet ports in each vertical wireway.
IntelliCenter Software
• MCC monitoring in Windows environment
• Pre-configured screens display real-time information
• Complete system documentation
• Software optimized to ensure performance- Polling algorithm segregates monitoring and control so
monitoring scans do not affect control scans
• Complements operator interface and product software such as DriveTools and RSEnergy
System configuration
• Node addresses downloaded into devices
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 78 of 143
•
Documentation CD created with MCC specific information
System testing
• IntelliCENTER software and documentation CD loaded onto PC
• DeviceNet powered up
• Software and component communication and functionality verified
18.2 SMC Dialog Plus Smart Motor Controller: Bulletin 150
For information in regards to understanding NEC Article 409 and UL508A,
supplement SB for Short Circuit Current Ratings, reference the following link:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/ul508a/
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/12768/229240/229262/3073021/229589/
The SMC Dialog Plus™ controller provides microprocessor controlled starting for
standard three-phase squirrel-cage induction motors. Four standard modes of operation
are available within a single controller:
Features
Products
• Built-in electronic motor overload
protection
• Metering
• SCANport™ communication
• Keypad programming
• Three programmable auxiliary
contacts
• Status indicator display
• 150 SMC™ Dialog Plus Smart
Motor Controller
• 150 SMC Dialog Plus NonCombination Smart Motor Controller
• 152/3 SMC Dialog Plus Combination
Smart Motor Controller
18.3 SMC-Flex (Less than 600 Vac)
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/Soft-Starters/SMC-Flex
The SMC Flex controller provides microprocessor controlled starting for standard 3-phase squirrel-cage
induction or Wye-Delta (6-lead) motors. Seven standard modes of operation are available within a single
controller.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1…1250 A Range
Seven Standard Start Modes
Options Include Pump Control and Braking Control
Built in SCR Bypass/Run Contactor
Built in Electronic Motor Overload Protection
CT on each Phase
Metering
LCD Display
Keypad Programming
•
Four
Programmabl
e
Auxiliary
Contacts
18.4 SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/Soft-Starters/SMC-3
The Allen-Bradley SMC-3 softstarters from Rockwell Automation provide integrated features and technology
previously unavailable in a compact 45 mm housing. The flexibility and capabilities of the SMC-3 make it
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 79 of 143
ideal for almost any application, and with the available accessories, the functionality and application range is
extended even further. The SMC-3 takes soft starting to a new dimension by providing increased intelligence
in a compact footprint. As standard, this true three-phase controlling device includes electronic overload
protection with adjustable trip class, increased motor and system diagnostics, configurable auxiliary contacts,
and multiple start and stop modes.
•
•
•
19
ControlNet
EtherNet
ProfiBus
Standard Drives
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Drives/Low-Voltage-AC-Drives
The Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex family of drives is geared for motor control applications ranging from low to
medium voltage. PowerFlex drives range from 0.2 kW (0.25 hp) to 6,770 kW (9,000 hp). Our Component
Class drives offer cost-effective motor control, geared for machine-level and stand-alone applications. Our
Architecture Class drives provide superior application flexibility and control system integration for a broad
range of power offerings. All PowerFlex drives offer commonality in networks, operator interface and
programming – factors that significantly contribute to ease-of-use and faster application start-up.
19.1 PowerFlex 40 (Component Class)
The PowerFlex 40 provides superior low-speed torque control for applications up to 15
HP.
DOCUMENTATION:
• PowerFlex 40 User Manual: 22B-UM001…….
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 80 of 143
•
•
PowerFlex 40 Quick Start: 22B-QS001…….
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001…….
APPLICATIONS:
• Pumps & Fans
• Material Handling – Conveyors, Palletizers,
• HVAC – Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Flange mount (Heatsink) drives are available to reduce overall enclosure size.
Drive Protection includes Motor Overload, Output Short Circuit, Output Ground Fault,
Over & Under Voltage.
Internal Chopper (7th Transistor) provides the ability to apply an optional Dynamic
Brake Resistor.
Highly configurable I/O including a 0-10V or 4-20mA analog output.
Sensorless Vector Control with autotuning provides optimum motor performance for
applications requiring high torque at low speeds.
Basic logic, timer and counter functions can save installation cost and panel space by
eliminating stand alone timing relays and counters or discrete wiring to a pico or
microcontroller.
PID, Flying start, S-curve and StepLogic™ functions provide increased application
flexibility.
Ease of programming with Integral keypad, remote mounted HIM’s or
DriveExplorer™ or DriveTools SP™ configuration software. Ten most commonly
programmed parameters grouped together for fast and easy startup.
Integral RS485 communications provides low cost network solutions. Add on
DeviceNet™, EtherNet/IP™ or Profibus communications provides increased
communication flexibility.
DIN rail mounting, Zero Stacking™ & large power and control terminals saves panel
space and installation time.
Integral filter for single phase230 volt drives & piggy back mounted external filters for
three phase ratings reduce the amount of space required when complying with EMC
requirements.
RATINGS:
• 100-115V – Single Phase (0.5 – 1.5Hp)
• 200-600V – Three Phase (0.5 – 15Hp)
• IP-20 (Open), IP-30 (Nema 1), IP-56 (Nema 4X / 12) with Heatsink.
• Standards – UL, CE, CSA, C-Tick
• Overload Capacity – (Normal Duty) -110% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds.
• Overload Capacity – (Heavy Duty) - 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds.
• Output Frequency Range - 0 - 400Hz.
• Control Voltage – 24V DC sinking or sourcing. 3-Dedicated Inputs and 4 Programmable.
• 1 – Analog Output (4-20ma or 0-10V)
• 3 – Digital Outputs (1-Form C relay, 2- Opto Coupled).
• Speed Regulation – 2% of base speed across 40:1 speed range using “Sensorless Mode” with No
Encoder.
19.2 PowerFlex 70 (Architecture Class)
The PowerFlex 70 can be programmed for Volts per Hertz, Sensorless Vector
or Vector Control with Force Technology to cover a wide range of applications
from fans to extruders up to 50 HP. Optional internal communication modules
provide fast and efficient control and/or data exchange with a host of
controllers over popular interfaces. These interfaces include: Ethernet IP,
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 81 of 143
DeviceNet, ControlNet, Remote IO, RS-485 DF-1, RS4850HVAC, ProfiBus,
LonWorks, InterBus, Canopen, Compac I/O.
DOCUMENTATION:
• PowerFlex 70 User Manual:
20A-UM001…….
• PowerFlex 70 Quick Start:
20A-QS001…….
• PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual:
PFLEX-RM001…….
• Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives: DRIVES-IN001…….
FEATURES:
• Encoder Feedback Option – (both 5V & 12V) for closed loop vector performance.
• Droop Control – for load sharing applications
• Dynamic User Sets – provides a way to switch between user sets with a digital input or over the network
command.
• Sleep / Wake Control – provides start / stop control from an analog input.
• Input Phase Loss Detection and Ground Fault Warning
• Flux Braking and Half Voltage Ride Through
• Level Sensitive Mode – applications requiring drive to run purely on “level” of the run signal, without a
fresh edge.
• Digital Input Data Logic
• Security Aware – Allows the user to turn off access from individual ports.
• Network Controlled Outputs
• Dedicated Drive Enable – activated by removal of a jumper, which dedicates digital input 6 as the
hardware enable.
• Flange mount (Heatsink) drives are available to reduce overall enclosure size.
• Drive Protection: Motor Overload, Output Short Circuit, Output Ground Fault, Over & Under Voltage.
• Internal Chopper (7th Transistor) provides the ability to apply an optional Dynamic Brake Resistor.
RATINGS:
• 200-240V 3Ph ( 0.5 – 25Hp); 380-480V 3Ph ( 0.5 – 50Hp); 500-600V 3Ph ( 0.3 – 20Hp)
• Open type/IP-20/UL type 1, IP-30 (Nema 1), IP-66 (Nema 4X / 12)
• Standards – UL, CE, CSA, C-Tick
• Overload Capacity – (Normal Duty) -110% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds.
• Overload Capacity – (Heavy Duty) - 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds.
• Output Frequency Range - 0 - 500Hz.
• Digital Inputs (6) – 24V DC (sinking / sourcing) or 115V AC (Option Module). - 6 Programmable inputs.
• Digital Outputs (2) - Form C type.
• 1 – Analog Output (4-20ma or 0-10V)
• Speed Regulation – 0.001% of base speed across 120:1 speed range using “Vector Control Mode”
19.3 PowerFlex® 70 AC Drive DriveGuard™ Safety Solutions
The safe-off drive is designed to safely remove power from the gate firing circuits
of the drive’s output power devices (IGBTs). This prevents them from switching in
the pattern necessary to generate AC power to the motor. This drive can be used
in combination with other safety devices to meet the stop and protection against
restart requirements of EN 954-1, category 3.
This safe-off option meets the following safety standards:
•
•
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 1:
General Requirements.
EN 954-1:1997; Category 3 – Safety-related parts of control systems.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 82 of 143
DOCUMENTATION:
• PowerFlex 70 “DriveGuard” Safe-Off User Manual User Manual:
PFLEX-UM001A-EN-P
19.4 PowerFlex 700 (Architecture Class)
The PowerFlex 700 can be programmed for Volts per Hertz, Sensorless
Vector or Vector Control with Force Technology to meet all application needs
up to 200 HP. Excellent torque production and tight torque regulation for the
most demanding applications like extruders and web processes. Additional
features include “TorqueProve” for vertical lift applications, Positioning and
adjustable voltage control. Optional internal communication modules provide
fast and efficient control and/or data exchange with a host of controllers over
popular interfaces. These interfaces include: Ethernet IP, DeviceNet,
ControlNet, Remote IO, RS-485 DF-1, RS4850HVAC, Profibus, LonWorks,
InterBus, Canopen, Compac I/O.
DOCUMENTATION:
• PowerFlex 700 User Manual:
20B-UM001…….
• PowerFlex 70 Quick Start:
20B-QS001…….
• PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual:
PFLEX-RM001…….
• Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives: DRIVES-IN001…….
APPLICATIONS:
• High Speed Spindles, Spindles
• Material Handling – Skillets, AGV’s,
• Conveyors – Chain Conveyors, Power Roller
Beds
• Turntables, Cross Transfers,
• Load Sharing applications
•
•
•
•
•
Extruders
Linear Motors (Adjustable Voltage Control)
Lifts & Hoists – (Torque Proving)
Web Handling / Tension Control
Fans & Pumps
FEATURES:
• Precise Speed Control (open or closed
• PTC Input
loop)
• Dedicated Enable Input (Selectable)
• Encoder Feedback / pulse input Option
• Network Controlled Outputs
• Position Indexing / Speed Profiling
• Inertia Ride-Through
• DC Bus regulation
• Flux Braking
• Slip Compensation or Droop Control
• 3 Digital and 2 Analog Outputs
• Advanced Flying Start (instantaneous)
• Process PI loop
• 6 High Speed Digital Inputs and 2 High Speed Analog Inputs
• Dynamic User Sets: a way to switch between user sets with a digital input or over a network command.
• Sleep / Wake Control – provides start / stop control from an analog input.
• Input Phase Loss Detection and Ground Fault Warning
• Security Aware – Allows the user to turn off access from individual ports.
• Torque Proving (includes Flux Up and Last Torque measurement)
• Vector Control with Force Technology for speed control or torque control, open loop or closed loop.
• Drive Protection: Motor Overload, Output Short Circuit, Output Ground Fault, Over & Under Voltage.
• Internal Chopper (7th Transistor) provides the ability to apply an optional Dynamic Brake Resistor.
RATINGS:
• 200-240V – 3Ph (0.5 – 100Hp); 380-480V – 3Ph (0.5 – 200Hp); 500-690V – 3Ph (1 – 150Hp)
• Open type/IP-20/UL type 1, IP-54/UL type 12
• Standards – UL, CE, CSA, C-Tick
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 83 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Overload Capacity – (Normal Duty) -110% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds.
Overload Capacity – (Heavy Duty) - 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds.
Output Frequency Range - 0 - 400Hz.
Operating speed range = 1000:1
Digital Inputs (6) - 24V DC (sinking / sourcing) or 115V AC. - 6 Programmable inputs.
Digital Outputs (3)
2 – Analog Input – Bipolar, differential (4-20ma and 0-10V)
2 – Analog Output – Bipolar, differential (4-20ma and 0-10V)
Speed Regulation: 0.001% base speed across 120:1 speed range w/ Vector Control Mode”(1000:1
Operate Range)
Torque Regulation - +/- 5% , 2500 rad/sec bandwidth (with feedback)
19.5 PowerFlex 700S (Architecture Class)
The PowerFlex 700S AC drive, a version of the PowerFlex 700 power platform, offers
optimized integration for the most demanding stand-alone and coordinated drive
control system applications up to 1250 Hp. Selectable high-performance motor
control algorithms utilizing FORCE Technology allows you to select Vector,
Sensorless vector, V/Hz and Permanent Magnet Motor Control. The PowerFlex 700S
with DriveLogix option combines the powerful performance and flexible control of
PowerFlex AC drives with high-performance Logix engine to produce a highly
functional, cost effective drive control solution. Optional internal communication
modules provide fast and efficient control and/or data exchange with a host of
controllers over popular interfaces. These interfaces include: Ethernet IP, DeviceNet,
ControlNet, Remote IO, RS-485 DF-1, RS4850HVAC, Profibus, LonWorks, InterBus,
Canopen, Compac I/O.
DOCUMENTATION:
• PowerFlex 700S User Manual:
20D-UM006…….
• PowerFlex 700S DriveGuard “Safe-Off” User Manual:
20D-UM007A…….
• PowerFlex 700S Reference Manual:
PFLEX-RM003A…….
• Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives: DRIVES-IN001…….
APPLICATIONS:
• Single Axis Positioning Applications
• Leader / Follower Synchronized Positioning
• Spindle Orient
• Storage Retrieval Systems
• Move to Hard Stop Applications
• Test Stands
• High Speed Spindles, Spindles
•
•
•
•
•
•
Material Handling – Skillets, AGV’s,
Conveyors – Chain Conveyors, Power
Roller Beds (PRB)
Turntables, Cross Transfers,
Load Sharing
Torque Proving (Vertical Lifts & Hoists)
Fans & Pumps
FEATURES:
• Vector Control - with Force Technology for speed control or torque control, open loop or closed loop.
• Selectable high-performance motor control algorithms utilizing FORCE Technology allows you to
select Vector, Sensorless vector, V/Hz and Permanent Magnet Motor Control.
• DriveLogix 5730 Option - Embedded LogixTM Controller.
o Supports 8 separate tasks with 32 programs per task, 1 continuous task / 7 periodic tasks
o Ladder Diagram / Function Block / Structured Text / Sequential Function Chart
o 1.5 Mbytes of user program memory
o Compac I/O
• Standard quadrature encoder input with optional feedback boards for Stegmann & Heidenhein high
resolution feedback, Resolver, Stahltronics, Temposonics, SSI linear feedback type).
•
Automatic feedback loss switch over to encoderless.
• SynchLink, a high performance, high speed, synchronization and drive-to-drive data link.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 84 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
o Processor synchronization for multiple devices
o 1 to 50 S e c tra ns fe r ra te s with m ultiple da ta configura tions.
Complete motor autotune and inertia measurement for both induction and permanent magnet motor
control
Dynamic User Sets – provides a way to quickly switch between entire user sets with a digital input or
over the network command.
Sleep / Wake Control – provides start / stop control from an analog input.
Input Phase Loss Detection
Ground Fault Warning – for early detection of system ground faults.
Flux Braking
Security Aware – Allows the user to turn off access from individual ports.
Network Controlled Outputs
Dedicated Drive Enable – activated by removal of a jumper, which dedicates digital input 6 as the
hardware enable.
Safe-Off Option – provides certified EN954-1 Category 3 functionality (Safe-Off and protection against
restart).
Flange mount (Heatsink) drives are available to reduce overall enclosure size.
Drive Protection includes Motor Overload, Output Short Circuit, Output Ground Fault, Over & Under
Voltage.
Internal Chopper (7th Transistor) provides the ability to apply an optional Dynamic Brake Resistor.
RATINGS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
200-240V – 3Ph (1 – 100Hp): 380-480V – 3Ph (1 – 1250Hp); 500-600V – 3Ph (1 – 600Hp)
690V …… - 3Ph (45Kw – 560Kw)
Open type / IP-20 / NEMA Type 1, IP-54 / NEMA Type 12 (Flange Mount), IP56 / NEMA Type 4X
Standards – UL, CE, CSA, C-Tick
Overload Capacity – (Normal Duty) -110% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds.
Overload Capacity – (Heavy Duty) -150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds.
Power Ride Thru: - 15milliseconds @ full load.
Output Frequency Range - 0 - 400Hz.
Operating speed range = 1000:1
Digital Inputs (6-Total) – DI-1, DI-2, DI-3 = 24V DC (sinking / sourcing)…. DI-4, DI5, DI-6 = 24V DC
(sinking / sourcing) or 115V AC. - All 6 Inputs are Programmable.
Digital Outputs (2) – Form C type
2 – Analog Input – Bipolar, differential (4-20ma and 0-10V)
2 – Analog Output – Bipolar, differential (4-20ma and 0-10V)
Speed Regulation – (Without Feedback) = 0.1% of base speed across 120:1 speed range using
“Vector Control Mode” (120:1 Operating Range)
Speed Regulation – (With Feedback) = 0.001% of base speed across 120:1 speed range using
“Vector Control Mode” (1000:1 Operating Range)
Torque Regulation - +/- 5% , 600 rad/sec bandwidth (without feedback)
Torque Regulation - +/- 5% , 2500 rad/sec bandwidth (with feedback)
19.6 PowerFlex® 750 Series (753 & 755) AC Drives (Architecture Class)
The PowerFlex 750-Series of AC drives was designed with your needs in mind. Your need for flexibility,
productivity and ease of use has been considered in every detail of these drives. The result is a family of
AC drives that provides an exceptional user experience, from initial programming through operation.
This robust family of AC drives offers high performance for a wide variety of industrial applications. The
PowerFlex 753 provides general purpose control for applications ranging up to 350 Hp/250 kW while the
PowerFlex 755 provides maximum flexibility and performance up to 2000 Hp/1500 kW.
Consider these key features of the PowerFlex 750-Series drives and how they can help you maximize
your productivity:
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 85 of 143
Simplified Integration with Logix – The PowerFlex 753 and 755 over seamless integration into the
Logix environment for simplified and enhanced configuration, programming, commissioning, diagnostics
and maintenance. Using either Add-on Profiles or embedded instructions*, you’ll be able to reduce
engineering time – and related costs – while improving the configuration, control and collection of data.
Communications – The PowerFlex 750-Series supports a comprehensive range of network protocols to
ease integration into your architecture. The PowerFlex 755 features an embedded EtherNet/IP™ port,
allowing you to easily manage drive data over EtherNet/IP networks. In addition, a dual-port EtherNet/IP
option module for the PowerFlex 750-Series provides flexible and cost-effective ways to apply
EtherNet/IP, including Device Level Ring functionality.
Safe Torque-off and Safe Speed Monitor – Help protect personnel and equipment while reducing
machine downtime with safety solutions up to and including PLe/SIL, Cat 3 and Cat 4. These safety
options provide a choice for safety levels depending on your application requirements.
DeviceLogix™ – Controls outputs and manages status information locally within the drive, allowing you
to operate the drive independently or complementary to supervisory control.
Configure for Your Application – Each drive has a slot-based hardware architecture that reduces
unnecessary add-ons and gives you the flexibility to select option cards to suit your application and
expand your drive for future needs. Supported hardware control options are common for the series to
help reduce your inventory and spare parts requirements.
Predictive Diagnostics – Prevent unplanned downtime with predictive diagnostics and built-in protection
features to help guard your investment. These settings allow the PowerFlex 750-Series to keep track of
information that affects the life of the drive components. PowerFlex 755 drives 250 k W/350 Hp and larger
have additional diagnostic features including built-in protection devices.
Application matched Packaging – Gain additional flexibility with packaging options that address a range
of application and environmental protection requirements.
Feedback – Options include Universal, Encoder and Dual Encoder feedback options. The Universal
Feedback option includes multiple feedback interfaces to support a wide range of applications. Interfaces
supported are Incremental, EnDat and Hiperface for Stegmann and Heidenhain high resolution feedback,
SSI and BiSS for rotary and linear applications. The drives also provide:
•
Automatic feedback loss switchover.
•
High-definition LCD display allows for six lines of text for more meaningful explanations of parameters
and events.
•
Standard I/O on the PowerFlex 753 provides a cost-effective solution.
•
Real-time clock provides time-stamped events vs. run-time data.
•
Additional DPI for expanded programming capability.
•
Increase safety performance levels with the Safe Speed Monitor option card which includes an
embedded safety relay.
•
Packaging options to meet application requirements.
•
DeviceLogix embedded control technology provides function block programming for stand-alone
control of basic applications.
•
Easily configure, control and collect drive data with standard embedded Ethernet port on the
PowerFlex 755.
•
Slot-based mechanical architecture to support additional options for I/O, feedback, safety,
communications and auxiliary power supply.
•
Optional Auxiliary Power Supply maintains control and communications in event that main power is
not present.
•
Easily assessable heat sink and internal fans.
•
“e-Tools” Simplify and Enhance Use of PowerFlex 750-Series Drives
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 86 of 143
•
Add-on Profiles
For simplified AC drive start-up and reduced development time, we’ve integrated Allen-Bradley®
PowerFlex drive configuration with Studio 5000™ Logix Designer software (formerly RSLogix™
5000). This single-software approach simplifies parameter and tag programming while still
allowing stand-alone drive software tool use on the factory floor.
•
Embedded Instructions
The PowerFlex 755 AC drive can be configured with drive instructions embedded in AllenBradley ControlLogix and CompactLogix Programmable Automation Controllers (PAC). These
are the same configuration parameters and programming instructions used by Allen-Bradley
Kinetix® servo drives, providing a common, enhanced user experience.
•
DriveTools™ SP Software Suite
A powerful PC-based software suite for programming, configuring, and troubleshooting.
• DriveExecutive™– for online/offline configuration and management of drives and drive
peripherals
• DriveObserver™ – for real-time trending of drive information
•
Connected Components Workbench™
Programming and configuration software supports all PowerFlex drives, Micro800™ controllers
and PanelView™ component graphic terminals. This software leverages proven Rockwell
Automation and Microsoft® Visual Studio® technologies for fast and easy controller
programming, drive configuration and integration with the HMI editor.
The Right Packaging for Your Application
Because application conditions and environments vary, PowerFlex 750-Series drives are available with a
choice of packaging options. From highly flexible IP00 open styles to MCC-style cabinets and other
features that help provide additional protection, there’s a PowerFlex 750-Series drive with the right
packaging to help you meet productivity goals.
PowerFlex 755 Floor Mount Drives with IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type Ratings
•
The PowerFlex 755 IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type drives are designed to provide packaging
flexibility, including the option for either vertical or horizontal mounting orientations. This option is
available in PowerFlex 755 floor mount drives with ratings up to 1500 kW/2000 Hp.
PowerFlex 750-Series Drives with IP54/UL Type 12 Ratings
•
For applications requiring additional protection from harsh environments, PowerFlex 753 and 755
drives are available with IP54/UL Type 12 enclosures. These enclosures help protect the drive
from dust and splashing water and are appropriate for moderately harsh indoor environments.
19.6.1 PowerFlex® 755 AC Drive
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Drives/PowerFlex-755
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 87 of 143
PowerFlex 755 is ideal for applications requiring positioning, speed or torque control up to 1500
kW/2000 Hp. The PowerFlex 755 is easily integrated with the embedded Ethernet port and has
five option slots to support additional options for feedback, I/O, safety, communications, and
auxiliary 24V DC control power.
The PowerFlex 755 AC drive can be integrated with a ControlLogix® or CompactLogix™ Programmable
Automation Controller (PAC) via drive instructions that are actually embedded in the PAC. This level of
integration is specic to PowerFlex 755 drives on EtherNet/IP
The first drive to be released from the Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex 750-Series, the PowerFlex 755 AC drive
provides greater functionality across your manufacturing systems from:
•
.75…1400 kW 400V AC (540V DC input)
•
1...2000 Hp 480V AC (650V DC input)
The PowerFlex 755 AC drive offers more selection for control and supporting hardware options than any
other drive in its class and in addition to all the options and benefits available in the PowerFlex 750Series, the PowerFlex 755 drives 250 kW/350 Hp and larger offer added benefits for maintenance and
installation flexibility.
•
Control pod is common with smaller ratings providing embedded Ethernet port and 5 slots for option
modules, and can be remote mounted (up to 23 m) for hassle-free access to low voltage control.
•
Roll in/out design makes the drive easy to install and service by allowing complete removal from cabinet,
providing generous room for wiring behind the drive. Power wiring can stay connected while unit is rolled
out.
•
Adjustable terminals provide flexibility for wiring preferences such as top or bottom entry.
•
Integrated fusing eliminates need for separatelymounted drive short circuit protection. Status is reported
from the drive to ease troubleshooting.
•
Replaceable surge protector reduces downtime after incoming transient voltage events. Status is reported
from the drive to ease troubleshooting.
•
Integrated DC link inductor enhances protection from power system events, and reduces input harmonics.6
•
Sealed cooling channel uses external air for main cooling, reducing contamination exposure for
electronics.
•
Modular construction allows fast and easy replacement of parts (e.g., main blower, capacitor assembly,
circuit boards), minimizing production downtime.
19.6.2 PowerFlex® 753 Series AC Drive
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Drives/PowerFlex-753
The PowerFlex 753 is ideal for general purpose applications requiring speed or torque control
up to 250 kW/350 Hp. Embedded I/O along with three option slots for safety, feedback,
communications, 24V power or additional I/O make the drive a flexible, cost-effective solution
operating from:
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 88 of 143
•
0.75…250 kW 400V AC (540V DC input)
•
1...350 Hp 480V AC (650V DC input)
As part of the PowerFlex 750-Series, the PowerFlex 753 has a common set of features and options to
help you maximize your investment and improve your productivity.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DeviceLogix™ — Embedded control technology that supports the manipulation of discrete
outputs and drive control functions, while using discrete inputs and drive status information
onboard the drive.
• Predictive Diagnostics — Allows the PowerFlex 750-Series to keep track of information that
affects the life of its cooling fans and relay outputs. The drive can also be programmed to monitor
the run time hours for machine or motor bearings.
Option Cards — Each drive has a slot-based architecture allowing you to build the drive to suit your
application. Supported hardware control options are common for both products, to help reduce your
inventory and spare parts requirements.
Safe Torque-Off and Safe Speed Monitor — These safety options provide a choice for safety levels
depending on your application requirements.
Communications — The PowerFlex 750-Series supports a variety of network protocols. Ethernet can
easily be added to the PowerFlex 753 with a communication module.
I/O — The PowerFlex 750-Series offers option cards for additional analog and discrete I/O. The
PowerFlex 753 comes with built-in I/O that can also be easily expanded with option cards.
Packaging — Factory and field installable enclosure options are available to meet most environmental
requirements: Open Type and Flange Mount options to support Cabinet Mount requirements, Extra
Protection Wall Mount for harsh environments, and supporting debris hoods and conduit plate kits.
Standard Power Structure — The PowerFlex 750-Series share a common power structure to provide
the same physical footprint and power range no matter what PowerFlex 750 -Series drive is used.
19.7 PowerFlex® 520 Series (523, 525, & 527) AC Drives
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Drives/PowerFlex-525
The Next Generation of Powerful Performance and Flexible Control
The new family of Allen-Bradley® PowerFlex® 520 AC drives deliver an innovative design that is
remarkably versatile and can accommodate systems ranging from standalone machines to simple system
integration.
By combining a variety of motor control options, communications, energy savings and standard safety
features in a cost-effective drive, the PowerFlex 520 drives are suitable for a wide array of applications.
See how the PowerFlex 520 AC drives can help you maximize your system performance and reduce your
time to design and deliver better machines.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 89 of 143
Leading Class - Common Attributes
•
Power ratings of 0.4 to 22 kW/0.5 to 30 Hp at 380/480V
•
Global voltage classes from 100-600V; Allow -15% / +10% input voltage
•
The modular design features an innovative removable control module that allows
installation and configuration at the same time to help increase productivity
•
An embedded port for EtherNet/IP™ supports seamless integration into the Logix
environment and EtherNet/IP networks
•
Optional dual port EtherNet/IP card provides more connectivity options, including device
level ring (DLR) Functionality
•
Programming with intuitive software and configure drives faster using a standard USB
interface
•
A dynamic LCD human interface module (HIM) supports multiple languages and features
descriptive QuickView™ scrolling text
•
Get your drive up and running faster with application specific parameter groups for
applications like conveyors, mixers, pumps and fans using the AppView™ tool
•
Define your own group of parameters with the CustomView™ tool
•
Help reduce energy costs with Economizer mode, energy monitoring features and
permanent magnet motor control*
•
Help protect personnel with embedded Safe Torque-Off
•
Endures high ambient temperatures up to 50°C (122°F); and with current derating and a
control module fan kit, up to 70°C (158°F)
•
A wide range of motor control:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multiple EMC filtering options
•
•
•
Volts/ Hertz
Sensorless vector control (Economizer Mode)
Closed loop velocity vector control
Control for permanent magnet motors*
Positioning with closed loop feedback allows simple positioning
Embedded EMC filtering at 1ph 200V & 3ph 400V class
Optional external EMC filtering for longer cable length
Conformal Coating to 3C2 specification (Chemical Gases only)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 90 of 143
Innovative Modular Design
 Reduces installation and configuration time
 Removable control module speeds
installation
 One control module supports entire power
range
 No additional size penalty when adding
option cards
Ease of Programming
 Studio 5000 Logix Designer: AOPs & ADC
 Connected Components Workbench™
Software (CCW)
 Dedicated application parameter groups
 MainsFree™ programming
Operation at High Ambient Temperature
 Up to 50°C (122°F)
 60°C (140°F) with current derating
 Optional fan kit allows 70°C (158°F)
operation with current derating
Communications
 Embedded EtherNet/IP (PowerFlex
525 only)
 Optional Dual Port EtherNet/IP
 Option Cards for DeviceNet,
Profibus DP
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 91 of 143
Safe-Torque Off
 Embedded Safe-Torque Off SIL2/PLd
standard (PowerFlex 525 only)
Flexible Installation
• Industry leading compact footprint
• No penalty for adding option cards
• Smallest mounting clearances available for
top and bottom of drive; requires only 50mm
(1.96 in) air-gap space for top and bottom
• Allow horizontal & vertical mounting
o
o
• Zero Stacking up to 45 C (113 F)
• Din-Rail mounting for frame A, B and C
o
drives, High ambient temperature till 70 C
o
(158 F)
Automatic Device Configuration (ADC)
 ADC allows a user to configure their Logix
system to automatically download a drive’s
configuration
 Ideal for drive replacement
 ADC is a version 20 and above feature
 Also compliments: Stratix 6000 & 8000 and
5700 switches
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 92 of 143
19.8 Ultra 3000 Drives
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/motion-control/ultra3000-servo-drive
The Ultra™ 3000 family provides one global solution through its complete set of servo drive products
ranging from simple standalone indexing applications to multi-axis integrated motion. Ranging from 110V
to 460V power input, these high-performance, digital servo drives meet global voltage requirements and
provide flexibility to perform in a variety of machine control architectures. In addition, the Ultra3000 drive
is integrated with the ControlLogix platform via SERCOS interface for integrated motion. The Ultra3000i
digital servo drive with indexing adds basic stand-alone control capability to the Ultra3000 feature set.
19.9 ArmorStart IP67 Motor Control Products
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/ArmorStart-Distributed-Motor-Controller
The ArmorStart™ Distributed Motor Controller is an integrated, pre-engineered combination starter for full
voltage, reversing and VFD applications. The ArmorStart is rated for local-disconnect service by
incorporating the Bulletin 140 Motor Protector as the local-disconnect.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4 inputs and 2 outputs to be used with sensors and actuators for monitoring the application
process.
LED status indication and built-in diagnostics capabilities.
IP67/Nema Type 4 enclosure design suitable for water wash down
environments.
Modular “plug and play” design provides simplicity in wiring the installation.
Quick disconnects for the I/O, communications, and motor connections
Optional Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad for local start/stop control
Short circuit protection per UL508E and IEC 60947.
Network and Expandable I/O Capabilities
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller delivers enhanced control
to access parameter settings and provides fault diagnostics and
remote start/stop control. DeviceNet is the communication protocol,
provided with the ArmorStart including DeviceLogix. Selecting the
ArmorPoint protocol allows the ArmorStart to communicate using
DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP.
The two outputs that are provided as standard which are a dual key connector
are sourced from the control voltage power of 24V DC and 120V AC. LED status
indication is also provided, as standard with the ArmorPoint protocol. When using
the ArmorPoint protocol, a maximum of two ArmorPoint Distributed Motor
Controllers can be connected to the ArmorPoint Distributed I/O product.
19.9.1 OnMachine ArmorStart IP67 Starter – 280 / 281
The ArmorStart 280 / 281 are Full Voltage starters used in applications requiring across-the-line
starting. Full in-rush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The ArmorStart Bulletin 280 offers
full-voltage starting, and the Bulletin 281 offers full-voltage starting for reversing applications.
•
•
•
•
•
Electronic motor overload protection accomplished electronically with an I2t
algorithm.
overload protection is programmable via the communication network
The overload trip class can be selected for class 10, 15, or 20 protection.
Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.
3-meter unshielded 4-conductor cordset
19.9.2
On Machine ArmorStart with SMC Technology - 283
The Bulletin 283 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller is an integrated, pre-engineered starter for
solid-state motor control applications. The quick disconnects for the I/O, communications and motor
connection reduces the wiring time and eliminates wiring errors.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 93 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Horsepower Range 0.5…10 Hp (0.37…5.5 kW)
Robust IP67/NEMA Type 4 enclosure rating
Modular Plug and Play Design
Quick Disconnect connections for I/O, communications and motor
4 Inputs and 2 Outputs (Expandable with ArmorPoint™)
LED Status Indication
DeviceNet™ Communications
DeviceLogix™ Component Technology
Connectivity to ArmorPoint Distributed I/O Products
ControlNet and EtherNet Communication via ArmorPoint
HOA Keypad Configuration, Source Brake Contactor, Safety Monitor
19.9.3
OnMachine ArmorStart IP67 VFD – 284
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller offers a simple, cost-effective method of integrating
combinations starters, I/O and network capabilities in your on-machine architecture.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Integrated circuit protection provides for group motor protection
Disconnect handle – for local disconnect function
4 inputs and 2 outputs
Communication capabilities (DeviceNet™ with built in
DeviceLogix™)
LED status indication, Fault Diagnostics
Modular Design
Quick Disconnects for I/O, motor, and communications
IP67/NEMA 4 enclosure rating
AC or DC control power for flexibility
3-meter unshielded 4-conductor cordset is provided as standard
0.5...5 (0.4...4.0 kW) and 200…480V AC, 50/60 Hz
Electronic motor overload protection accomplished electronically with an I2t algorithm.
HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function for local start/stop control: (JOG and Forward/Reverse).
•
•
Starting Modes
Volts per Hertz (Sensorless Vector Performance)
Sensorless Vector Control
Options
• EMI Filter
• Output Contactor
• Source Brake Contactor
• Dynamic Brake Connector
• 3-meter unshielded 4-conductor cordset or shielded with optional EMI filter
19.9.4
OnMachine ArmorStartLT IP67 VFD – 290/294
ArmorStart LT, Bulletin 290/291/294 is an integrated, pre-engineered distributed
motor control solution. It provides excellent performance at a great value to meet
today’s needs in size, simplicity, and performance. It also provides material
handling equipment suppliers with a compact footprint which is essential when
space is at a premium, without sacrificing performance or functionality. The user
will experience premier integration with ArmorStart LT and the Rockwell
Automation family of Logix PLCs. ArmorStart LT is available with Full Voltage, Full
Voltage Reversing, or Variable Speed motor control performance. It is equipped with
a UL Listed At-Motor Disconnect that supports a lock-out tag-out (LOTO) provision.
ArmorStart LT is listed suitable for group motor installations per UL and can be
applied with either branch circuit breaker protection or fuse protection. It provides a
robust IP66/ UL Type 4/12 enclosure suitable for water washdown environments in a
single box construction that will minimize inventory needs. All external connections
are made from the bottom of the unit. The power, control, and motor connections
ArmorStart LT
294
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 4-April-2014
Page 94 of 143
are made via a gland plate, as standard. ArmorStart LT provides several standard
features. It can be ordered with EtherNet/IP or DeviceNet network support. Each
unit will be equipped with quick disconnect receptacles for I/O and the network.
Users will experience tools such as a Logix Add-on Profile, Setup Wizards, Autogenerated tags, and embedded webserver support that allows access to status and
diagnostics from anywhere in the world. Lastly, the electronic control module
(ECM) includes externally accessible node address
switches, configurable I/O, and comprehensive status and
diagnostics LEDs.
The ArmorStart LT can also be configured with several
options that can further reduce installation and
commissioning time. Quick disconnects are available for
power, control, and motor connections, using
ArmorConnect™ cable solutions. A Hand-Off-Auto keypad
for local control is an available option. The optional internal
power supply (IPS), eliminates the need to run separate
control power. ArmorStart LT
Bulletin 294 can be configured with an electromechanical
brake connection for the motor brake.
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-Control/ArmorStart-LT-Distributed-Motor-Controller
19.10
Drive/Device Logix
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/drives/software/rslogix-5000-integration-with-drives
The Allen-Bradley PowerFlex®, ArmorStart drives offers high performance drive control, advanced features
and built-in diagnostics. It combines the performance and flexible control of drives and I/O with the Logix
engine to produce a highly functional control solution for Machining applications.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Embedded Logix control programmability and
control of auxiliary functions.
Uses the common programming environment
RSLogix 5000 and supports multiple programming
languages.
Local connection for up to sixteen 1769 Compact
I/O modules established by a cable into the drive
control expanded option cassette.
Compact Flash card for non-volatile user memory
storage for up to 1.5 Mbytes
NetLinx communication board.
Optional integrated EtherNet/IP module is
located on the main drive control cassette and
supports distributed I/O.
19.11
ArmorConnect Power Media
http://www.ab.com/en/epub/catalogs/3784140/10676228/4129860/6480313/
•
•
•
•
•
Cordsets
Patchcords
Receptacles
Tees
Reducers
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 95 of 143
20
Allen Bradley matched AC Motors
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motors
Allen-Bradley drives and motors are Control-Matched as a system to help solve
common operating problems:
•
Inverter grade motor insulation systems are designed to meet and exceed
NEMA MG1 Part 31.40.4.2 standards for resistance
to spikes of 1600 volts with a 0.1 microsecond rise
time. In addition, each Allen-Bradley Control-Matched
motor insulation system is rated for a minimum of
1600 volts CIV (Rockwell Automation test method) at
rated operating temperature.
•
•
•
•
•
Reduced electrical and acoustic noise
Improved dynamic response.
Cool operating performance.
Wider torque and speed range.
Superior service life with a minimum of maintenance
20.1 Servo motor - 1326AB Heavy Duty motors
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/customclassics/mc/1326ab.ht
ml
Torque Plus motors are high performance, 3Ø, brushless, AC,
synchronous servo motors intended to be used with the Kinetix 6000 Servo
Drives.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
An extruded aluminum housing for improved heat transfer.
Multiple feedback options:
o Rugged, brushless resolver
o Absolute multi-turn and single-turn encoder
o Multi-turn encoder
100% continuous-rated output torque at stall (zero rpm).
A UL Listed insulation system (file #E57948).
Ability to be vertically mounted at any angle with the shaft up or down .
Three-phase sinusoidal wound stator for smooth operation at low speeds.
TENV construction, IP 65 rated enclosure, and IP67 optional (IP67 cables must be specified)
An NC thermal switch in the motor (rated 115V AC/24V DC at 1A) provides thermal overload indication.
A precision balance of 0.0127 mm (0.0005 in.) total peak-to-peak displacement.
A CEI/IEC 72-1 metric flange mount with metric shafts.
1326AB 460V Torque Plus Servo motors range in continuous torque capability from 2.3 to 53 NM and
reach speeds of 7250 RPM.
20.2 Servo motor - MPL Low inertia motors
http://www.ab.com/motion/servomotors/lowinertia.html
MP-Series low-inertia, high output, brushless servo motors are intended to be
used with the Kinetix 6000 Digital Servo Drive with SERCOS interface.
Available in 5 frame sizes, these motors provide continuous torque capabilities
from 1.58 to 150 Nm (14 -1327 lb -in.) and peak torques from 3.61 to 290 Nm
(32-2566 lb-in.).
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 96 of 143
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Integral 24 volt brake option
Optional Shaft Seal for IP 66 environmental rating
Absolute Feedback Option
o Multi-turn and single-turn option provides absolute feedback – no need for a homing routine
o Up to 2 million counts per revolution, Smooth rotation even at low speeds
o Ability to control higher load-to-motor rotor inertia ratios while maintaining a stable system.
Segmented core technology yielding up to 40% higher torque per size than conventional servo motors
Enhanced winding encapsulation for increased thermal efficiency
High-energy neodymium magnets for quicker acceleration
Low profile, field reversible motor connectors for minimal servo motor impact on machine design
20.3 Servo motor – MPM Medium inertia motors
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/MP-Series-Servo-Motors
High Performance for Medium Inertia Applications
The MP-Series™ (Bulletin MPM) Medium Inertia Servo Motors offer a compact, power dense, feature-rich
solution for applications with heavier loads and greater inertia. Leveraging the proven MP-Series motor
technology and quality standards, these new servo motors are ideal for users with print, converting, web
handling, automotive, and other applications requiring more power in a smaller package.
Customers who currently use MP-Series Low Inertia Motors will enjoy complete mechanical
interchangeability with the new MP-Series Medium Inertia Motors. All couplers, gear boxes, and similar
mechanical components are identical, providing convenience for customers using both types of motors. In
addition, cable selection and stocking is simplified through the use of DIN standard cables on a complete
range of MP-Series motors and actuators.
The MP-Series medium inertia servo motors offer IEC metric mounting dimensions and rotatable DIN
connectors that provide flexible connector orientation.
Features
High resolution absolute encoder and resolver feedback
230V AC and 460V AC windings
Multiple winding speed options, optimized for use with Kinetix 6000 (Series B) and Kinetix 6200 servo drives.
High performance segmented stator design
Performance-matched to the legacy 1326AB Medium Inertia Servo Motors, providing a clean migration into
the latest MP-Series servo motors
20.4 HPK-Series High Power Induction Servo Motors
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/HPK-Series-High-Power-ServoMotors
HPK Series Servo Motors are high horsepower motors that employ induction motor technology providing
high reliability and durability in demanding applications. These AC motors were engineered for optimized
performance when used with the Allen-Bradley Kinetix 7000 High Power Servo Drive. Available in five frame
sizes, these 460 volt motors provide continuous stall torque from 96 to 482 Nm (849-4266 lb-in.).
•
Rated for 200% service factor
•
Standard IEC flange and/or foot mount.
•
Integral blower cooling allows higher performance in a compact package.
•
Motor winding optimized to provide constant torque over a wide speed range.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 97 of 143
•
High resolution feedback (up to 2 million counts per revolution), Multi-turn absolute feedback option .
•
Continuous torque from 96 to 482 Nm (849 to 4266 lb-in.) and peak torque from 192 to 964 Nm (1699 to
8531 lb-in.) with base speeds of 1500 and 3000 rpm.
•
Standard DIN feedback connector and junction box for power connections simplify installation wiring.
•
Equipped with shaft seal, automatic T-drains, corrosion resistant hardware, and gasketed junction box.
•
UL recognized component to applicable UL and CSA standards. CE marked for all applicable directives.
20.5 RDD-Series Direct Drive Motors
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/RDD-Series-ServoMotors
The RDD-Series Motors are designed to deliver dynamic performance
along with the benefits of direct drive technology. By connecting directly
to the load, these motors eliminate the need for gearboxes, timing belts,
pulleys and other mechanical components. The result is reduced system
compliance and energy consumption along with faster settling times and
better overall control of the load.
Other benefits include:
•
Reduced downtime and maintenance due to simplified mechanics and reduced part count
•
Lower total cost of ownership with fewer parts and reduced production losses
•
Simplified machine design and improved time to market with Motion Analyzer software tools
•
Seamless integration into the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture with a single environment for
programming, control, and data collection.
•
High torque at low speeds to match your application needs
The initial release of the RDD-Series, the Bulletin RDB, incorporates a bearingless housed configuration
designed for applications where the load is already supported by its own bearings, such as unwind/rewind
stands, web guides and print, nip and feed rolls. Available with a continuous torque range of 5 to 426 Nm,
these bearingless motors simplify installation while minimizing package size and alleviating alignment issues
between the motor and the load.
The Bulletin RDB bearingless motors feature:
•
Continuous torque to 426 Nm
•
Bearingless rotor
•
Multiple speed options
•
Windings optimized for use with the latest Kinetix servo drives
•
Heidenhain high resolution absolute encoders, single- and multi-turn options
•
Rotatable DIN connectors
•
Environmental protection to IP65
20.6 Actuators
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motion-Control/Actuator
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 98 of 143
Overview
The MP-Series integrated linear motion products provide simplification and time-savings by providing linear
actuators and linear stages as completely integrated devices that fit seamlessly into the Rockwell
Automation Integrated Architecture™. Just enter your application requirements directly into the Motion
Analyzer sizing and optimization software (version 4.4. or later) and a servo-driven linear stage or linear
actuator; can be selected based on desired performance, without having to worry about how it will interface
with the control system.
21
Power and Energy Management
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Energy-Monitoring
21.1 Powermonitor 1000
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Energy-Monitoring/1408-PowerMonitor1000
Energy management and understanding energy costs are a major focus
today in the manufacturing industry. The Allen-Bradley Powermonitor 1000 is
a cost effective energy monitoring and control solution. The Powermonitor
1000 is perfect for your applications where load profiling, cost allocation, or
energy control is required. It can also proide seamless integration into your
existing energy monitoring systems where sub-metering is required. The
Powermonitor 1000 is available in five models (two transducers, and three
energy-monitors), with features and a price point to meet your application.
Transducer models feature the ability to measure voltage, current, and power related tags. Energy-monitor
models feature the ability to measure consumption related tags such as real, reactive, and apparent energy.
The top of the line energy-monitor (EM3) provides all the features of both the transducer and energy-monitor
models.
The Powermonitor 1000 integrates into your existing energy monitoring systems featuring, RSView,
RSPower, or RSEnergyMetrix to further enhance the view into energy costs. Your existing Allen-Bradley
PLC's (PLC-5, SLC, ControlLogix Family) can also easily communicate to the Powermonitor 1000 to allow
energy data to be used in control systems.
Features
•
Compact Size
•
Available EtherNet/IP, Serial DF1, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP Communications
•
Integrated LCD Display
•
Panel or DIN Rail Mounting
•
UL, cUL, CE Certifications
•
Wiring Diagnostics
•
Time of Use (On-Peak, Off-Peak)
•
Logs — Energy, Min/Max, Status, and Load Factor
•
View Data and Configure Through The Integrated Web Page
•
Revenue Meter Accuracy
•
Two Status Inputs
•
Configurable KYZ Output
•
Integration with RSPower™, RSEnergyMetrix®, and RSView®
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 99 of 143
Applications
•
Demand Management
•
Electrical SCADA
•
Emergency Load Shed
•
Electrical Optimization
•
Energy Accountability
•
HVAC
•
Machine Level Monitoring
21.2 Powermonitor 3000
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Energy-Monitoring/1404-PowerMonitor-3000
A Compact Power Meter with Enhanced Communications
The Allen-Bradley Powermonitor 3000 is a power quality and sub-metering
monitor that is used by energy consumers in critical power and energy
management applications. The Powermonitor 3000 meters deploy state-of-theart dual-port technology, helping customers leverage the high-performance
newer networks without the need for cumbersome serial interface bridges.
Features
•
Many features set the Powermonitor 3000 apart from other power meters such as:
•
High-Speed Oscillography — The Powermonitor 3000 provides simultaneous captures of all 7 channels
in non-volatile memory with up to 408 cycles per cycle per capture.
•
Harmonic Analysis — The Powermonitor 3000 measures percent distortion and magnitude up to the
41st harmonic. It performs harmonic calculations, such as TIF, %THD, K-factor, Crest factor and
compliance check to IEEE-519.
•
Communications — Every Powermonitor 3000 meter comes with a standard native RS-485
communication port that supports the DF1half-duplex slave protocol and Modbus RTU. It also comes
with a variety of additional factory-installed communications options such as EtherNet I/P,
DeviceNet,ControlNet, Remote I/O and RS-232. The EtherNet I/P communication card also includes a
built-in HTML web page for Internet read access of all critical power and energy data.
•
Compact Size — The Powermonitor 3000 meter consists of a master module and an optional display
module. The master module mounts easily into existing switchgear or Motor Control Centers (MCCs),
eliminating the need for an external enclosure. The display also fits into existing 4-inch ANSI cutouts,
which lowers installation costs for both new and retrofitted applications.
Other Valuable Features
•
Real-time power monitoring with 50 ms selectable update rate
•
Configurable data logs, up to 45,867 records deep
•
Event logs that are 100 records deep
•
Min-Max logs values for 74 parameters
•
Time stamped data logging to nearest 0.01 second
•
All logs stored internally in a non-volatile memory
•
configurable setpoints
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 100 of 143
•
Projected demand
•
Sag and Surge Detection
•
Load Factor calculation
•
Electronic KYZ pulse output
•
Ability to do external demand interval sync via external contact
closure or communication
•
Support for addressing onboard I/O using Remote I/O discrete data
reads
•
IEEE 519 power quality pass/fail test
•
ANSI C12.16 revenue accuracy, IEC1036, Class 1
•
ANSI C37.90-1989 breaker trip ratings, transient and oscillatory
•
UL, CUL, CE certified
•
PLC-5, SLC 500, and ControlLogix system compatibility
•
RSView32 and RSLinx software compatibility
•
Powermonitor 3000 has a sub-metering version that contains all of the functionality listed above except:
•
High-speed oscillography
•
Harmonic analysis
•
10 Configurable setpoints instead of 20
•
50 Event Log records instead of 100
•
Sag and surge detection
•
Load Factor calculations
21.3 PowerPad Portable Powermonitor (Bulletin 1412)
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Energy-Monitoring/1412-PowerPad-PowerMonitor
The PowerPad is a Portable Powermonitor unit that allows you to monitor power anywhere in your facility
with superior functionality and accuracy. The lightweight portable unit is self-contained including the
Powermonitor, CT's and cables, manuals, and software.
The integrated LCD display provides access to all real-time and accumulated power parameters, power
quality measurements including harmonics up to the 50th order, transient detection and capture, device
status and configuration, set-point status and configuration, and various alarm options. The unit also comes
with an optically isolated RS-232 to be used along with the software for data storage, analysis and report
generation communication port.
21.4 RSEnergyMetrix Software
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellsoftware/assetmgmt/energymetrix/index.html
Overview
RSEnergyMetrix™ is a sophisticated Web-enabled, energy management software package that puts critical
energy information at your desktop. The RSEnergyMetrix Software Suite combines data communication,
client-server applications, and Microsoft's advanced .NET™ Web technology to provide you with a complete
energy-management solution.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 101 of 143
With RSEnergyMetrix, you can capture, analyze, store, and share energy data across your entire enterprise
via a LAN or WAN using a simple Web browser. This makes it simple to distribute the knowledge you need
to optimize energy consumption, which can help improve productivity while lowering energy costs.
RSEnergyMetrix helps managers and engineers solve on-going, energy-related challenges. With
RSEnergyMetrix, you can:
•
Correlate energy costs to production costs
•
Provide accurate cost accounting based on consumption
•
Generate energy reports and charts for a process, department, facility or enterprise
•
Optimize energy procurement and help negotiate better rates
•
Make decisions on electrical capacity
•
Avoid unscheduled shutdown
•
Procure and analyze energy information with minimum capital investment
21.5 Condition Monitoring Solutions
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/solutions/conditionmonitoring/index.html
Condition monitoring systems or programs help keep your plant floor running productively by detecting
potential equipment failures. Previously, a problem was recognized by:
•
Noise identified by maintenance people
•
Visual identification by operators
•
Control system indicators such as temperature or pressure
•
Electrical equipment issues such as high current
•
Product quality reports
Emonitor® — An Integrated Suite of Maintenance Data Functions
Today's globally competitive economy has resulted in significant shifts in the relationships between
producers, suppliers, and consumers. The need for improved production reliability and reduced expenses is
clearly demonstrated by production strategies such as "just-in-time" material supply and delivery.
As a manufacturer, to be successful in this environment, it is vital that you optimize your investment in critical
production assets. Simply put, to ensure future growth you must maximize your Return on Net Assets
[RONA = (Plant Revenue-Costs) / Net Assets]. The Emonitor family of products provides you with a suite of
integrated maintenance data functions to leverage information about your assets. This enables you to make
intelligent, informed decisions that maximize uptime, reduce inventory, cut production and maintenance
costs, and improve your Overall Equipment Effectiveness [OEE = Availability x Rate x Quality].
22
Addendum A: QUICK START MANUALS
22.1 Drives:
PowerFlex: 40
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/qs/22b-qs001_-en-p.pdf
PowerFlex: 40P
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/qs/22d-qs001_-en-p.pdf
PowerFlex: 700S
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/qs/20d-qs001_-en-p.pdf
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 102 of 143
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/qs/20d-qs003_-en-p.pdf
22.2 ArmorStart
Selection Guide
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/sg/280-sg001_-en-p.pdf
ArmorStart Users Manual
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/um/284-um001_-en-p.pdf
22.3 Stack Light , DeviceNet, 855T
User Manual
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/um/855t-um001_-en-p.pdf
22.4 Terminal Blocks/Wiring and Connection Systems
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/ca/a117-ca913_-en-p.pdf
Allen-Bradley I/O Modules Wiring and Pin Outs
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/wd/cig-wd001_-en-p.pdf
23
Addendum B: GROUNDING PROCEDURES
For General grounding procedures refer all electrical standards, specifications and the Chrysler
Powertrain specifications. In addition Rockwell Automation product guidelines can be found on the
WEB site at:
The Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Publication 1770-4.1
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/in/1770-in041_-en-p.pdf
24
Addendum C: Components List
Note: The Components List is project specific and may differ from the list referenced here.
Catalog #
440R-C23017
440R-N23198
440R-J23102
440R-E21358
Description
Chrysler NPM Code
(NPICS)
Safety Relays
ALLEN BRADLEY 440R-C23017 SAFETY RELAY 24 VCA/CD
ALLEN BRADLEY 440R-N23198 solid state safety relay
ALLEN BRADLEY MONITORING SAFETY RELAY 24VDC
SAFETY RELAY, 24Vac/dc, Inputs (1NC, or 2NC), Outputs (6 N.O.) Aux
Outputs (2NC)
440R-E21358
MSR122 expansion relay, I/P:1NC or 2NC, O/P:6NO, Aux O/P 1NC,
24VAC/DC,
440R-D23171
ALLEN BRADLEY SAFETY RELAY 1 N.C. + 1 N.O. Inputs (Two-Hand
Control), 2 N.O. Safety Outputs, 24VDC
440R-N23132
440R-C23139
ALLEN BRADLEY SAFETY RELAY 440R-N23132
ALLEN BRADLEY RELAY- MSR131RTP INPUT 1N.O. &2N.C.
CONTACT OUTPUTS 3, AUX CONTACT OUTPUTS 2, SOLID STATE
OUTPUTS 2, 115VAC.
440R-E23191
MSR132 expansion relay, I/P:1NC/2NC, O/P:4NO, Aux O/P 2NC,
24VAC/DC fixed terminals,
440R-E23192
22-205-1821
22-205-1886
22-205-1760
Time Delay - 0s
MSR132 expansion relay, I/P:1NC/2NC, O/P:4NO, Aux O/P 2NC, 24VDC
fixed terminals,
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 103 of 143
440R-E23097
Time Delay - 0.5s
MSR132 expansion relay, I/P:1NC/2NC, O/P:4NO, Aux O/P 2NC,
24VAC/DC,
440R-E23159
removable terminals, Time Delay - 0s
MSR132 expansion relay, I/P:1NC/2NC, O/P:4NO, Aux O/P 2NC,
24VAC/DC,
440R-M23065
440R-G2321a
removable terminals, Time Delay - 0.5s
ALLEN BRADELY MINOTAUR SAFETY RELAY
MSR142 multi-output relay, 7NO Safety outputs, 4NC (2PNP) Aux
Outputs,
440R-C23205
a = 6 (24VAC/DC)
MSR144 multi-output relay, Inputs: 1NC/2NC, Outputs: 2N), Aux Outputs
2NC PNP, 24VDC
440R-H23176
440R-H23178
440R-H23180
22-205-1689
AB MINOTAUR MSR210P MODULAR SAFETY RELAY BASE UNIT
AB MINOTAUR MSR220P MODULAR SAFETY RELAY INPUT MODULE
AB MINOTAUR MSR230P MODULAR SAFETY RELAY OUTPUT
MODULE
AB MINOTAUR MSR240P MODULAR SAFETY RELAY
COMMUNICATION MODULE
22-205-1761
22-205-1762
22-205-1763
440R-H23184
AB MINOTAUR MSR245P MODULAR SAFETY RELAY DISPLAY
MODULE
22-205-1765
440R-W23219
440R-W23218
MSR310P Base Module (RS232)
MSR320P Universal Input Module (Max of 9 can be used with a Muting
Lamp Module)
440R-W23217
440R-W23221
440R-W23222
440R-W23223
MSR329P Muting Lamp Module
MSR330P Output Module (Group 1)
MSR330P Output Module (Group 2)
MSR330P Output Module (Group 3)
Cable Pull Switches
ALLEN BRADLEY Cable pull E-STOP SWICH
ALLEN BRADLEY 30M LRTS INSTALLATION KIT
ALLEN BRADLEY 15M LRTS INSTALLATION
ALLEN BRADLEY 20M LRTS INSTALLATION KIT
ALLEN BRADLEY 75m LIFELINE ROPE TENSIONER INSTALLATION
KIT
ALLEN BRADLEY SAFETY ACCESSORIES PULLEY
ALLEN BRADLEY TENSION SPRING
ALLEN-BRADLEY SAFETY ACCESSORY Cable gripper
ALLEN-BRADLEY CABLE-RED-125M
ALLEN-BRADLEY ACCESSORY TENSIONER SYS
ALLEN-BRADLEY EYEBOLT
Safety Mats/ Controller
300 x 600 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
440R-H23183
440E-L13043
440E-A13083
440E-A13081
440E-A13082
440E-A13085
440E-A17101
440E-A13078
440E-A17106
440E-A17129
440E-A17112
440E-A17003
440F-M0612BBNN
22-205-1764
22-204-0543
22-204-0775
22-205-1626
22-204-0776
22-205-1555
22-205-1553
22-205-1554
22-205-1809
22-205-1810
22-205-1811
22-205-1812
78-276-9005
440F-M0618BBNN
300 x 900 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9006
440F-M0624BBNN
300 x 1200 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9007
440F-M0912BBNN
450 x 600 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9008
440F-M1212BBNN
600 x 600 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9009
440F-M1812BBNN
900 x 600 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9010
440F-M1818BBNN
900 x 900 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9011
440F-M1224BBNN
1200 x 600 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9012
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 104 of 143
440F-M1824BBNN
1200 x 900 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9013
440F-M2424BBNN
1200 x 1200 mm w/4.5 meter (15ft) 2-wire cables exit out the B corners,
Black w/out trim.
78-276-9014
440F-C28024
24 VDC max. 8 mats Cable gland for connection of mats, for use with
"BB"
78-276-9001
440F-M0612CBNN
300 x 600 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M0618CBNN
300 x 900 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M0624CBNN
300 x 1200 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M0912CBNN
450 x 600 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M1212CBNN
600 x 600 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M1812CBNN
900 x 600 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M1818CBNN
900 x 900 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M1224CBNN
1200 x 600 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M1824CBNN
1200 x 900 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-M2424CBNN
1200 x 1200 mm w/9.1 meter (30ft) One 4 wire cable with M12 connector
exits out of upper left, Black w/out trim.
440F-T3220
440F-T3210
440F-T3012
440F-T3013
440F-C28011
Active uniting to join two mats, 2 meter (6.5ft) length square ends.
Standard primeter Aluminium, 2 meter (6.5ft) length square ends.
External conner standard primeter Aluminium.
Internal conner standard primeter Aluminium.
24 VDC max. 8 mats 8 - M12 connectors for connection of mats, for use
with "CB"
78-276-9040
78-276-9041
78-276-9042
440F-C28024
SAFETY MAT CONTROLLER, ALLEN-BRADLEY GUARDMASTER
24VDC 8 MAT CONNECTIONS
78-276-9001
440G-MT47126
440K-MT55138
440N-S32024
440N-S32021
440N-S32036
440N-Z21S16a
440N-Z21S26a
440N-Z21S17a
871A-SCBP18
871A-BP18
871A-BRS18
Safety Gate Switches
Solenoid w/ mini QD connector
(MT-GD2) non-Solenoid w/ mini QD connector 2 N.C. 1 N.O.
ALLEN BRADLEY SIPHA SENSOR
ALLEN BRADLEY SIPHA 2 CONTROL UNIT 2
ALLEN BRADLEY SWITCH-SIPHA MAG SAFETY 24VDC & 120 VAC
ALLEN BRADLEY SensaGuard M18 barrel, plastic, 18mm target, 2
Safety Outputs, 1 Aux Output
22-205-2094
22-205-2093
22-205-1411
22-205-1412
22-205-1791
a = H (8 Pin Micro Pigtail)
A (3m Cable)
B (10m Cable)
ALLEN BRADLEY SensaGuard M18 barrel, plastic, 30mm target, 2
Safety Outputs, 1 Aux Output
a = H (8 Pin Micro Pigtail)
A (3m Cable)
B (10m Cable)
ALLEN BRADLEY SensaGuard M18 barrel, Stainless Steel, 18mm
target, 2 Safety Outputs, 1 Aux Output
a = H (8 Pin Micro Pigtail)
A (3m Cable)
B (10m Cable)
SensaGuard Mounting Bracket
SensaGuard Mounting Bracket
SensaGuard Mounting Bracket
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 105 of 143
60-2649
100SA11
70A86
100SA02
100SA20
100S-A10
100S-C23D14C
SensaGuard Mounting Bracket
Safety Contactors
ALLEN BRADLEY CONTACTOR 100SA11
ALLEN BRADLEY COIL 120 VAC
ALLEN BRADLEY AUXILLARY CONTACT
ALLEN BRADLEY AUXILLARY CONTACT
ALLEN-BRADLEY AUX. CONTACT, N.O.
ALLEN BRADLEY 100S-C23D14C SAFETY CONTACTOR A/B 100SC23D14C SAFETY CONTACTOR MCS-100S-C
22-204-0469
22-204-0470
22-204-0639
22-204-0640
22-204-0785
22-204-0891
100S-C12DJ404C
ALLEN BRADLEY SAFTEY CONTACTOR, MECHANICALLY LINKED
POOSITIVELY G
22-204-0917
100S-C16DJ404C
ALLEN BRADLEY SAFTEY CONTACTOR MECHANICALLY LINKED
POSITIVELY G
22-204-0918
193-EA1DB
104-C16DJ22
ALLEN BRADLEY 193-EA1DB OVERLOAD RELAY
ALLEN BRADLEY 104-C16DJ22 REVERSING CONTACTOR,4NO MAIN
POLES 1NC AUX CONTACT
22-204-0919
22-204-0920
100S-C09DJ14C
100S-C12DJ14C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 24VDC COIL
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 100S-C12DJ14C 24VDC
COIL
22-204-1600
22-204-1602
100S-C16DJ14C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 100S-C16DJ14C 24VDC
COIL
22-204-1604
100S-C23DJ14C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 100S-C23DJ14C 24VDC
COIL
22-204-1606
100S-C09UDJ14C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 100S-C09UDJ14C
24VDC COIL
22-204-1620
100S-C12UDJ14C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 100S-C12UDJ14C
24VDC COIL
22-204-1622
100S-C16UDJ14C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 100S-C16UDJ14C
24VDC COIL
22-204-1624
100S-C23UDJ14C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY CONTACTOR 100S-C23UDJ14C
24VDC COIL
22-204-1626
104S-C09DJ210C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY REVERSING CONTACTOR 104SC09DJ210C 24VDC
22-204-1640
104S-C12DJ210C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY REVERSING CONTACTOR 104SC12DJ210C 24VDC
22-204-1642
104S-C16DJ210C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY REVERSING CONTACTOR 104SC16DJ210C 24VDC
22-204-1644
104S-C23DJ210C
ALLEN BRADLEY IEC SAFETY REVERSING CONTACTOR 104SC23DJ210C 24VDC
22-204-1646
100S-CabcBC
General 100S, 104S, and 700S part number breakdown
100 S Safety Contactor with Bifurcated Front Mount Aux Contact, 3 Pole,
Ie = 9A – 23 A
a = Ie [A]: 09 (AC-3 = 9A, AC-1= 32A),
12 (AC-3 = 12A, AC-1= 32A)
16 (AC-3 = 16A, AC-1= 32A),
23 (AC-3 = 23A, AC-1=
32A)
b = Coil Voltage (AC Coils only): more options available
KJ (24V, 50/60Hz), KF (230V, 50/60Hz), KB (440V, 50/60Hz), B
(480V, 60Hz)
100S-CabcBC
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only): more options available
AJ (24V, Standard), DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
c = Contact Configuration: 05 (Main: 3 N.O., 0 N.C. ; Aux 0 N.O., 5 N.C.)
14 (Main: 3 N.O., 0 N.C. ; Aux 1 N.O., 4 N.C.)
304 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 0 N.O., 4 N.C.)
404 (Main: 4 N.O., 0 N.C. ; Aux 0 N.O., 4 N.C.)
100 S Safety Contactor with Bifurcated Front Mount Aux Contact, 3 Pole,
Ie = 30A – 85 A
a = Ie [A]: 30 (AC-3 = 30A, AC-1= 65A),
37 (AC-3 = 37A, AC-1= 65A),
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 106 of 143
43 (AC-3 = 43A, AC-1= 85A),
60 (AC-3 = 60A, AC-1=
72 (AC-3 = 72A, AC-1= 100A).
85 (AC-3 = 85A, AC-1=
100A),
100A)
b = Coil Voltage (AC Coils only): more options available
KJ (24V, 50/60Hz), KF (230V, 50/60Hz), KB (440V, 50/60Hz), B
(480V, 60Hz)
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only for 100/104S-C09 .. C43): more options
available
AJ (24V, Standard), DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only for 100/104S-C60 .. C85): more options
available
100S-CabcBC
DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
c = Contact Configuration: 04 (Main: 3 N.O., 0 N.C. ; Aux 0 N.O., 4 N.C.)
14 (Main: 3 N.O., 0 N.C. ; Aux 1 N.O., 4 N.C.)
100 S Safety Contactor with Bifurcated Front Mount Aux Contact, 4 Pole,
Ie = 9A – 23 A
a = Ie [A]: 09 (AC-3 = 9A, AC-1= 32A),
12 (AC-3 = 12A, AC-1= 32A)
16 (AC-3 = 16A, AC-1= 32A),
23 (AC-3 = 23A, AC-1=
32A)
b = Coil Voltage (AC Coils only): more options available
KJ (24V, 50/60Hz), KF (230V, 50/60Hz), KB (440V, 50/60Hz), B
(480V, 60Hz)
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only): more options available
AJ (24V, Standard), DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
c = Contact Configuration: 404 (Main: 4 N.O., 0 N.C. ; Aux 0 N.O., 4 N.C.)
304 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 1 N.O., 4
N.C.)
104-S-CabcBC
104 S Reverse Safety Contactor with Bifurcated Front Mount Aux
Contact, Ie = 9A – 23 A
a = Ie [A]: 09 (AC-3 = 9A, AC-1= 32A)
12 (AC-3 = 12A, AC-1= 32A)
16 (AC-3 = 16A, AC-1= 32A)
23 (AC-3 = 23A, AC-1= 32A)
b = Coil Voltage (AC Coils only): more options available
KJ (24V, 50/60Hz), KF (230V, 50/60Hz), KB (440V, 50/60Hz), B
(480V, 60Hz)
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only for 100/104S-C09 .. C43): more options
available
AJ (24V, Standard), DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
c = Contact Configuration: 012 (Aux 0 N.O., 6 N.C.) -ORN.O., 5 N.C.)
104-S-CabcBC
210 (Aux 1
104 S Reversing Safety Contactor with Bifurcated Front Mount Aux
Contact, Ie = 30A – 85 A
a = Ie [A]: 30 (AC-3 = 30A, AC-1= 65A),
37 (AC-3 = 37A, AC-1= 65A),
43 (AC-3 = 43A, AC-1= 85A),
60 (AC-3 = 60A, AC-1=
72 (AC-3 = 72A, AC-1= 100A).
85 (AC-3 = 85A, AC-1=
100A),
100A)
b = Coil Voltage (AC Coils only): more options available
KJ (24V, 50/60Hz), KF (230V, 50/60Hz), KB (440V, 50/60Hz), B
(480V, 60Hz)
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only for 100/104S-C09 .. C43): more options
available
AJ (24V, Standard), DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 107 of 143
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only for 100/104S-C60 .. C85): more options
available
700S-CFBabC
DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
c = Contact Configuration: 010 (Aux 0 N.O., 5 N.C.)
210 (Aux 1 N.O., 5 N.C.)
Safety Relays
700S Safety Control Relays with Gold Plated Bifurcated Front Mount Aux
Contact,
AC-12: Ie = 10A @ 40° C, 6A @ 60° C
AC-15: Ie = 3A @ 24V, 2A @ 400V, 0.7A @600-690V
a = Contact Configuration: 440 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 1 N.O., 3
N.C.)
530 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 2 N.O., 2
N.C.)
620 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 3 N.O., 1
N.C.)
b = Coil Voltage (AC Coils only): more options available
KJ (24V, 50/60Hz), KF (230V, 50/60Hz), KB (440V, 50/60Hz), B
(480V, 60Hz)
700S-CFabC
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only): more options available
ZJ (24V, Standard), DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
700S Safety Control Relays with Standard Contacts,
AC-12: Ie = 10A @ 40° C, 6A @ 60° C
AC-15: Ie = 3A @ 24V, 2A @ 400V, 0.7A @600-690V
a = Contact Configuration: 440 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 1 N.O., 3
N.C.)
530 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 2 N.O., 2
N.C.)
620 (Main: 3 N.O., 1 N.C. ; Aux 3 N.O., 1
N.C.)
b = Coil Voltage (AC Coils only): more options available
KJ (24V, 50/60Hz), KF (230V, 50/60Hz), KB (440V, 50/60Hz), B
(480V, 60Hz)
700S-Pab
Coil Voltage (DC Coils only): more options available
ZJ (24V, Standard), DJ (24V, w/ Integrated Diode)
700S-P Control Relays, [email protected] / [email protected], AC Coils, Open
Type Panel Mount Relay Rail Mount
a = Contact Configuration:
310 (3 N.O., 1 N.C), 220 (2 N.O., 2 N.C.), 710 (7 N.O., 1 N.C.),
620 (6 N.O., 2 N.C.),
530 (5 N.O., 3 N.C), 440 (4 N.O., 4 N.C.), 350 (3 N.O., 5 N.C.),
1020 (10 N.O, 2 N.C.)
700S-DCPab
b = AC Voltage Suffix code: A24 (24V), A1 (115-120), A4 (460-480)
700S-P Control Relays, [email protected] / [email protected], 24VDC Coils,
a = Contact Configuration:
310 (3 N.O., 1 N.C), 220 (2 N.O., 2 N.C.), 710 (7 N.O., 1 N.C.),
620 (6 N.O., 2 N.C.),
530 (5 N.O., 3 N.C), 440 (4 N.O., 4 N.C.), 350 (3 N.O., 5 N.C.),
1020 (10 N.O, 2 N.C.)
b = Z24 (Open Type Panel Mount Relay Rail Mount),
Type DIN Rail Mount)
700S-PKab
DZ24 (Open
700S-P Control Relays,c [email protected] / [email protected], AC Coils,
a = Contact Configuration:
310 (3 N.O., 1 N.C), 710 (7 N.O., 1 N.C.), 620 (6 N.O., 2 N.C.),
530 (5 N.O., 3 N.C), 440 (4 N.O., 4 N.C.), 350 (3 N.O., 5 N.C.),
1020 (10 N.O, 2 N.C.)
b = A1 (Open Type Panel Mount Relay Rail Mount), DA1 (Open Type
DIN Rail Mount)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 108 of 143
700S-DCPKab
700S-P Control Relays, [email protected] / [email protected], DC Coils,
a = Contact Configuration:
310 (3 N.O., 1 N.C), 710 (7 N.O., 1 N.C.), 620 (6 N.O., 2 N.C.),
530 (5 N.O., 3 N.C), 440 (4 N.O., 4 N.C.), 350 (3 N.O., 5 N.C.),
1020 (10 N.O, 2 N.C.)
b = Z24 (Open Type Panel Mount Relay Rail Mount), DZ24 (Open Type
DIN Rail Mount)
1494G-DF3N6-98
1494G-FF3J6
1494G-BF3N-98-412
1494G-CF3R6
1494GX-BF3J6
1494G-bcdefg
Safety Disconnects
AB 1494G-DF3N6-98 ENCLOSED DISCONNECT SWITCH 3 POLE 3
PHASE NON-FUSIBLE WITH N.O. AUX CONTACT FACTORY
INSTALLED
AB ENCLOSED DISCONNECT 400A, TYPE 3R/4/12 - ENCLOSURE
CODE "F"
22-209-0746
22-209-0833
ALLEN BRADLEY ENCLOSED DISCONNECT ALLEN BRADLEY
1494G-BF3N-98-412 ENCLOSED DISCONNECT 30 AMP NON
FUSEABLE
ALLEN-BRADLEY 1494G-CF3R6 60A DISCONNECT SWITCH,
ENCLOSED
22-209-0847
ALLEN BRADLEY DISCONNECT BOX
1494G Enclosed Disconnect Safety Switch in standard size enclosure,
600V, 30 – 600A
22-204-0825
22-209-0859
b = Switch Rating: 30 (30A) , 60 (60A), 100 (100A), 200 (200A), 400
(400A, 600 (600A)
c = Enclosure Type:
F (Type 3R/4/12), C (Type 4/4X), S (Type 4/4X), K (Type 12)
d = Poles:
2 (2 pole, 1 phase), 3 (3-pole, 3 phase), 6 (6 pole,
3 phase)
e = Fusing:
R)
N (Non-fusible), H (Class H), J (Class J), R (Class
f = Fuse Voltage:
g = Options
6 (600VAC/DC)
898R-P68MT-A5
Safety Connection Systems
Safety Wired Distribution box, Dual-Channel 2NC, plus individual
Enunciation, 8 port,
898R-P68MT-A10
10-30VDC, 5 m
Safety Wired Distribution box, Dual-Channel 2NC, plus individual
Enunciation, 8 port,
898R-61MU-RM
889R-F6ECRM-a
898D-44KT-DM4
10-30VDC, 10 m
Shorting Plug for unused ports
Patchcord, straight to straight DC Micro, a = 1,2,3,5, or 10 (m)
Safety Wired Distribution box, Dual-Channel NC/NO, No Enunciation, 4
port, 10-30VDC
898D-48KT-DM4
Safety Wired Distribution box, Dual-Channel NC/NO, No Enunciation, 8
port, 10-30VDC
898D-41KU-DM
898D-44LT-DM4
Shorting Plug for unused ports
Safety Wired Distribution box, Dual-Channel NC, No Enunciation, 4 port,
10-30VDC
898D-48LT-DM4
Safety Wired Distribution box, Dual-Channel NC, No Enunciation, 8 port,
10-30VDC
898D-41LU-DM
898D-F4ACDM-a
898D-43LY-D4
Shorting Plug for unused ports
Patchcord, straight to straight DC Micro, replace a with 1,2,3,5 or 10 (m)
T-Port/Splitter, Dual-Channel w/ 4pin DC Micro, PUR body, 10-30VDC,
3A, 2 NC
898D-43KY-D4
T-Port/Splitter, Dual-Channel w/ 4pin DC Micro, PUR body, 10-30VDC,
3A, 1 NC, 1NO
Monitors
Phase Monitor: 150-500V AC, 60 Hz
Supply Voltage 24Vdc (115 Vac, 230Vac available), (50 Hz available)
813S-E2CZJ60
Phase Monitor: 250-690V AC, 60 Hz
Supply Voltage 24Vdc (115 Vac, 230Vac available), (50 Hz available)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
813S-E2BZJ60
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 109 of 143
809S-E1ZJ
809S-E2ZJ60
809S-E3ZJ60
809S-CT1
809S-CT2
809S-CT3
809S-CT4
817-E1
817-E2
819-E1
819-E2
855TCB24Y4Y3Y6Y8
Current Monitor: 0.5-5A AC/DC (1Ø), 2-24.9V, 20-249V,
Supply Voltage 24Vdc (115 Vac, 230Vac available)
Current Monitor: 2-15A AC/DC (1Ø), 60 Hz
Supply Voltage 24Vdc (115 Vac, 230Vac available), (50 Hz available)
Current Monitor: 0.5-5A AC/DC (3Ø), 60 Hz
Supply Voltage 24Vdc (115 Vac, 230Vac available), (50 Hz available)
Current Transformers - For 809S-E1, -E3, Trip Current 4.2-50 A
Current Transformers - For 809S-E1, -E3, Trip Current 17-200 A
Current Transformers - For 809S-E1, -E3, Trip Current 42-500 A
Current Transformers - For 809S-E1, -E3, Trip Current 100-1200 A
Thermistor Monitor: Automatic Reset, Supply Voltage 24-240V AC/DC
Thermistor Monitor: Automatic, Manual, or Remote Reset, Supply Voltage
24-240V AC/DC
Motor Speed Monitor: Max Voltage 400 V AC (IEC), 300V AC (CSA/UL)
Supply Voltage 24Vdc (115 Vac, 230Vac available)
Motor Speed Monitor: Max Voltage 690 V AC (IEC), 600V AC (CSA/UL)
Supply Voltage 24Vdc (115 Vac, 230Vac available)
Stack Lights
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, Surface Mount With Cap, Black Housing,
24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Yellow Steady LED (bottom), Blue
Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
855TVB24Y4Y3Y6Y8
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With
Cap, Black Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Yellow Steady LED
(bottom), Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
855TEB24 Y4Y3Y6Y8
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, 25cm Pole Mount With Cap, Black
Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Yellow Steady LED (bottom),
Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
855TCDM1B24 Y4Y3Y6Y8
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, Surface Mount With Cap, Black Housing,
24V DC DeviceNet Micro-Connection, Yellow Steady LED (bottom), Blue
Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
855TVDM1B24 Y4Y3Y6Y8
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With
Cap, Black Housing, 24V DC DeviceNet Micro-Connection, Yellow
Steady LED (bottom), Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady
LED (top)
855TEDM1B24 Y4Y3Y6Y8
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, 25cm Pole Mount With Cap, Black
Housing, 24V DC DeviceNet Micro-Connection, Yellow Steady LED
(bottom), Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
855TCB24 Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, Surface Mount With Cap, Black Housing,
24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Clear Steady LED (bottom), Yellow
Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED
(top)
855TVB24 Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With
Cap, Black Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired,Clear Yellow Steady
LED (bottom), Yellow Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED,
Red Steady LED (top)
855TEB24 Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, 25cm Pole Mount With Cap, Black
Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Clear Steady LED (bottom),
Yellow Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady
LED (top)
855TCDM1B24Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, Surface Mount With Cap, Black Housing,
24V DC DeviceNet Micro-Connection, Clear Steady LED (bottom), Yellow
Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED
(top)
855TVDM1B24Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With
Cap, Black Housing, 24V DC DeviceNet Micro-Connection, Clear Steady
LED (bottom), Yellow Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED,
Red Steady LED (top)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 110 of 143
855TEDM1B24Y7Y8Y6Y3Y4
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, 25cm Pole Mount With Cap, Black
Housing, 24V DC DeviceNet Micro-Connection, Clear Steady LED
(bottom), Yellow Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red
Steady LED (top)
855TB24TLx
Light Module, Steady LED Module, 24 VDC
x = 8 (yellow), 7 (clear), 6 (blue), 5 (amber), 6 (blue), 4 (red), 3 (green)
Light Module, Flashing LED Module, 24 VDC
x = 8 (yellow), 7 (clear), 6 (blue), 5 (amber), 6 (blue), 4 (red), 3 (green)
Light Module, Strobe, 24 VDC
x = 8 (yellow), 7 (clear), 6 (blue), 5 (amber), 6 (blue), 4 (red), 3 (green)
Mounting Base, Surface Mount, Black with Cap
Base, 10mm pole, Black with Cap
Base, 25mm pole, Black with Cap
Base, 100mm pole, Black with Cap
Base, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With Cap
Base, DeviceNet Micro-connect with 1 m cable, 25mm pole, Black with
cap
855TB24GLx
855TB24BRx
855T-BCBC
855T-BPM10C
855T-BPM25C
855T-BPM40C
855T-BVMC
855T-DM2BPM25C
855TDM2BVMC
855ECB24Y4Y3Y6Y8
855EMB24Y4Y3Y6Y8
Base, DeviceNet Base With Right Angle Bracket And Mini Receptacle
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, Surface Mount With Cap, Black Housing,
24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Yellow Steady LED (bottom), Blue
Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With
Cap, Black Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Yellow Steady LED
(bottom), Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
855EVB24Y4Y3Y6Y8
Assembled 4 LED-Stack Light, 25cm Pole Mount With Cap, Black
Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Yellow Steady LED (bottom),
Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED (top)
855ECB24Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, Surface Mount With Cap, Black Housing,
24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Clear Steady LED (bottom), Yellow
Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady LED
(top)
855ECB24Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With
Cap, Black Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Clear Steady LED
(bottom), Yellow Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red
Steady LED (top)
855ECB24Y4Y3Y6Y8Y7
Assembled 5 LED-Stack Light, 25cm Pole Mount With Cap, Black
Housing, 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Wired, Clear Steady LED (bottom),
Yellow Steady LED, Blue Steady LED, Green Steady LED, Red Steady
LED (top)
855E24TLx
Light Module, Steady LED, Black, 24 VDC
x = 8 (yellow), 7 (clear), 6 (blue), 5 (amber), 6 (blue), 4 (red), 3 (green)
Light Module, Flashing LED, Black, 24 VDC
x = 8 (yellow), 7 (clear), 6 (blue), 5 (amber), 6 (blue), 4 (red), 3 (green)
Light Module, Strobe, Black, 24 VDC
x = 8 (yellow), 7 (clear), 6 (blue), 5 (amber), 6 (blue), 4 (red), 3 (green)
Sound Module, Black, 24 VDC, Single Circuit, Single Tone
Stack Light Base Unit, With Top Cover, 24 VDC
Stack Light Base Unit Vertical Mount, With Top Cover, 24 VDC
Stack Light, Support Tube, 100mm
Mounting Base, Surface Mount, Black with Cap
Base, 10mm pole, Black with Cap
Base, 25mm pole, Black with Cap
Base, 40mm pole, Black with Cap
Base, Right Angle Bracket / Vertical Mount With Cap
Industrial Horns
a = D30 (10-30VDC), A24 (24 VAC), A10 (110 VAC), A20 (230VAC)
b = A (100dB / 10 tone gray), B (104dB / 32 tone gray), C (112dB / 32
tone gray),
855E24GLx
855E24BRx
855EB24SA3
855EBCBC
855EBVMC
855EBPM10
855E-BCBC
855E-BPM10C
855E-BPM25C
855E-BPM40C
855E-BVMC
855H-BabD
D (119dB / 45 tone gray), E (126dB / 45 tone gray)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 111 of 143
855B-GMS24Ra
855Ba-b24cd
855Ba-LH24
855Ba-AbLc
855Ba-AbAc
855Ba-b
Mini square Beacons, 24VDC
a = 3 (green), 4 (red), 6 (blue), 7 (clear), 8 (white)
Round Beacons, 24 VDC
a = M (120 mm), L (160 mm)
c = DH (steady halogen), FH (flashing halogen), RH (rotating halogen),
BR (strobe)
d = 3 (green), 4 (red), 6 (blue), 7 (clear), 8 (white)
Lamps, halogen, 24 VDC
a = M (120 mm), L (160 mm)
Lenses
a = M (120 mm), L (160 mm)
b = S (replacement smooth lens) or F (replacement fresnel lens)
c = 3 (green), 4 (red), 6 (blue), 7 (clear), 8 (white)
Power Module Assemblies
a = M (120 mm), L (160 mm)
b = R (replacement rotating power), D (replacement steady power),
F (replacement flashing power), B (replacement strobe power)
c = 3 (green), 4 (red), 6 (blue), 7 (clear), 8 (white)
Miscellaneous accessories and replacement parts
a = M (120 mm), L (160 mm)
b = ALSG (lens gaskets), AMM (magnetic mount), ASFG (surface mount
gaskets),
AMTG (Metric tube gaskets), AWP (rough wall plate, AVM (vertical
bracket),
LS (strobe tube), ABS (surface mount base), ABT (tube mount base)
42GRU-9200-QD
42GRP-9000-QD
Sensors
Other sensing modes available
Standard Polarized Retro, 4 pin DC Micro, 10-40V DC, 30mA,
Standard Diffuse, 4 pin DC Micro, 10-40V DC, 30mA, 5 foot range: 10'
and 15' available
42GRR-9000-QD
42GRL-9000-QD
Standard Transmitted Beam Rec, 4 pin DC Micro, 10-40V DC, 15mA
Standard Transmitted Beam Source, 4 pin DC Micro, 10-264V AC/DC,
15mA
889D-F4AC-2
42CM-a8P-b
Recommended 4-pin DC Micro QD cordset (-2 = 2m)
18mm Metal Cylindrical, Class 1 Laser Sensor, PNP
a = D8M (Standard Diffuse),
E8Z (Transmitted Beam-Light Source), R8M (Transmitted Beam
LO/DO)
b = A2 (2m 300V cable) or D4 (4-pin DC micro)
example: 42CM-E8EZB-A2 (transmitted beam, o/p Light Source, 2m
300V cable)
example: 42CM-R8MPB-D4 (tramsmitted beam, LO/DO, PNP, 4-pin
micro)
42EF-P2MPB-F4
Other sensing modes available
Polarized Retro, 10.8-30V DC, 35mA, 0.25–3m sensing dist, PNP, 4pin
DC micro QD
42EF-D1MPAK-F4
Standard Diffuse, 10.8-30V DC, 35mA, 0.03–3m sensing dist, PNP, 4pin
DC micro QD
42EF-R9MPBV-F4
42EF-E1EZB-F4
Transmitted Beam Rec, 10.8-30V DC, 25mA, PNP, 4pin DC micro QD
Transmitted Beam Source, 10.8-30V DC, 4m operate dist, 25mA, 4pin
DC micro QD
42EF-USKBB-F4
Retroreflective, 10.8-30V DC, 25mm-4.5m operate dist, NPN and PNP
100mA, Dark Operate, 4pin DC micro QD
423F-U2JBB-F4
Retroreflective, 10.8-30V DC, 25mm-4.5m operate dist, NPN and PNP
100mA, Light Operate, 4pin DC micro QD
889D-F4AC-2
Recommended DC Micro QD cordset (-2 = 2m)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 112 of 143
42EF-P8KBC-F4
18mm Right Angle Polarized Retroreflective, 24VDC, 50mm – 15M
sensing distance, Teach adjustment, Dark Operate, NPN and PNP
100mA, 4-pin DC micro QD
42EF-P8JBC-F4
18mm Right Angle Polarized Retroreflective, 24VDC, 50mm – 15M
sensing distance, Teach adjustment, Light Operate, NPN and PNP
100mA, 4-pin DC micro QD
42EF-D8KBA-F4
18mm Right Angle Standard Diffuse, 24VDC, 300mm sensing distance,
Single-Turn Knob adjustment, Dark Operate, NPN and PNP 100mA, 4pin DC micro QD
42EF-R7KBB-F4
18mm Right Angle Standard Diffuse, 24VDC, 300mm sensing distance,
Single-Turn Knob adjustment, Light Operate, NPN and PNP 100mA, 4pin DC micro QD
42EF-R7JBB-F4
18mm Right Angle Transmitted Beam, 24VDC, 15mm-40m sensing
distance, Dark Operate, NPN and PNP 100mA, 4-pin DC micro QD
45BPD-8LTB1-D5
45BPD Laser Sensor, sensing range 30-100mm, measuring range 70mm
45BPD-8LTB2-D5
45BPD Laser Sensor, sensing range 80-300mm, measuring range
220mm
45BRD-8JKB1-D4
45CPD-8LTB1-D5
45BPR Laser Sensor, sensing range 45-85mm, measuring range 40mm
45CPD Laser Sensor, sensing range 200-6000mm, measuring range
5800mm
42KL-P2LB-F4
Polarized Retro, 10.8-30V DC, 35mA, 0.25-2m sense dist, PNP, 4pin DC
Micro
42KL-D1LB-F4
Standard Diffuse, 10.8-30V DC, 35mA, 1-380mm sense dist, PNP, 4pin
DC Micro
42KL-RLB-F4
Transmitted Beam Rec, 10.8-30V DC, 35mA, 30m sense dist, PNP, 4pin
DC Micro
42KL-E1EZB-F4
Transmitted Beam Source, 10.8-30V DC, 35mA, 1-30m sense dist, 4pin
DC Micro
889D-F4AC-2
42CM-abcPd-D4
Recommended DC Micro QD cordset (-2 = 2m)
18mm Metal Cylindrical Photoelectric, 10-30VDC, PNP, 4pin DC Micro
a = U (Retroreflective), P (Polarized Retroreflective), D (Standard
Diffuse), B (Background
Suppression), E (Transmitted Beam-Light Source), R (Transmitted
Beam LO/DO)
b = 1 (Infrared Beam 880nm) or 2 (Visible Red 660nm)
c = M (o/p 100mA-4ms or 2ms), L (o/p 100mA-0.5ms), E (o/p Light
Source-Transmitted Beam)
d = B (sense dist= 3-4m or 3-20m for Transmitted Beam), AE (sense
dist= 0-100mm),
AL (sense dist= 0-400mm), BC (sense dist= 50mm), BE (sense dist=
100mm)
42CF-abcPd-D4
12mm Metal Cylindrical Photoelectric, 10-30VDC, PNP, 4-pin DC micro
a = P (Polarized Retroreflective), D (Standard Diffuse),
E (Transmitted Beam-Light Source), R (Transmitted Beam LO/DO)
b = 1 (Infrared Beam 880nm) or 2 (Visible Red 660nm)
c = L (O/p 100mA-1.25ms), E (O/p Light Source-Transmitted Beam)
d = A1 (sense dist=3mm-2m for Polarized or 0-100mm Standard Diffuse),
A2 (sense dist=0-300mm for Standard Diffuse),
B (sense dist= 3-4m o/p Light Source-Transmitted Beam), B1(LO/DOTransmitted Beam)
873P-Dabc-d
Ultrasonic Sensor, Analog or Descrete
a = B (18mm Barrel Diam) or C (30mm Barrel Diam)
b = NP (N.O. PNP), AC (4-20mA), AV (0-10VDC)
c = 1 (sense range = 100-600mm for 18mm/30mm Barrel -or- 3002500mm for 30mm Barrel),
2 (sensing range = 200-1500mm -18mm or 30mm Barrel)
d = D4 (Micro QD - 18mm Barrel) or D5 (Micro QD - 30mm Barrel)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 113 of 143
873P-DCabc-d
Ultrasonic Sensor, Programmable, 30mm Barrel with Micro QD
connection
a = AC (2 PNP with 4-20mA), AV (2 PNP with 0-10VDC)
b = 1 (sensing range =150-1500mm) or 2 (sensing range = 350-3500mm)
48MS-SE1PF2-M2
48MS-SE1PF1-M2
845H-SJabcdeYfg
MultiSight Vision Sensor, Focal Length of Lens = 12 mm
MultiSight Vision Sensor, Focal Length of Lens = 6 mm
requires external lighting
Encoders
Incremental Encoder
a = D (square flange), E (70mm Diam flange), F (90mm Diam flange), G
(Metric Servo 48mm),
H (English Servo), J (Metric Servo 42mm)
b = A (6mm shaft diam), B (10mm shaft diam), C (1/4in shaft diam), Z
(3/8in shaft diam),
K (6mm w/ Flat), L (10mm w/Flat), M (1/4in w/Flat), N (3/8in w/Flat), P
(3/8in w/double Flat)
c = 1 (5VDC) or 2 (8-24VDC)
d = 2 (PNP current source), 4 (DLD 5VDC RS422), 6 (DLD 8-24 VDC)
e = xx (PPR resolution range 1-5000)
f = 1 (Axial Connect End), 2 (Radial Connect Side), A (Axial Cable End),
R (Radial cable side)
g = BLANK (w/o mating connector), C (with mating connect), 1 (1m), 5
(5m), 9 (9m)
845T-abcdef-g
Heavy Duty Incremental Encoder
a = D (square flange), H (Servo w/ Face mount holes), L (Servo w/o Face
mount holes)
b = A (6mm shaft diam), B (10mm shaft diam), C (1/4in shaft diam), Z
(3/8in shaft diam),
K (6mm w/ Flat), L (10mm w/Flat), M (1/4in w/Flat), N (3/8in w/Flat)
c = 1 (5VDC in / DLD out), 2 (5VDC in / P-P out), 3 (11-24VDC in / P-P
out),
4 (11-20VDC in / 5VDC DLD out), 5 (24VDC in / 5VDC DLD out),
6 (11-24VDC in / 11-24VDC DLD out)
d = 1 (Channel A Only), B (Channel A and B), C (Channel A, B, and Z)
e = A (6 Pin connector), B (7 pin connector), E (10 pin connector), P
(pigtail cable)
f = xx (PPR resolution range 1-3000)
g = BLANK (w/o mating connector), C (with mating connect), 1 (1m), 5
(5m), 9 (9m)
844D-abcdef
Hollow Shaft Incremental Encoder
a = A (blind-shaft) or B (through-shaft)
b = 4 (1/2" shaft), 5 (5/8" shaft), 6 (3/4" shaft), 7 (7/8" shaft), 8 (1" shaft),
9 (1-1/8" shaft), M (30mm shaft)
c = A (mount-tether, 1/2" bolt on 7.25" dia to fit 8-1/2" NEMA C)
B (mount-tether, 3/8" bolt on 5.88" dia to fit 4-1/2" NEMA C)
C (mount-tether, 3/8" bolt on 2.5-4.0" dia radius)
D (mount - anti-rotation pin)
d = C (10 pin connect), T (terminal block), 1 (1m cable)
e = 1 (5VDC in / DLD out), 2 (5-26VDC in / DLD out), 3 (5-15VDC in /
DLD out),
4 (8-26VDC in / 5VDC DLD out), 5 (10-30VDC in / 10-30VDC pushpull out),
845G-F3abcdefg
f = xx (PPR resolution range 1-3000)
Single Turn Absolute Encoder
a = D (square flange), S (English Servo)
b = B (Natural Binary), D (Binary Coded Decimal), G (Gray Code)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 114 of 143
c = 5 (5VDC), 8 (8-24VDC), A (10-30VDC)
d = H (High tune), L (Low Tune)
e = P (Push-Pull), S (SSI Output),
f = xxx (resolution: bit and range from 8bit/0-255 to 15bit/0-32,767)
g = A (Axial 19-Pin), R (Radial 19-pin), S (Axial 17-pin), T (Axial 12-Pin),
U (Radial 12-pin)
837E-Da1BN1bc
889D-F4AC-2
889D-R4AC-2
839E-Da1BAbc-D4
Switches
Temperature Switch, Dual PNP, Stainless Steel, IP68, cULus and CE,
12-24VDC
a = A1 (Dual PNP ouput) or C1 (4-20mA output with Single PNP output)
b = A1 (Set Pnt = -49°..150C°, Probe length 50mm),
A2 (Set Pnt = -49°..150C°, Probe length 100mm)
A3 (Set Pnt = -49°..150C°, Probe length 200mm)
c = D4 (4-pin DC Micro Cordset)
Recommended cordset 2m 4-pin DC micro (straight)
Recommended cordset 2m 4-pin DC micro (right angle)
839E Flow Switch, Measures liquids from 0.03-3 m/s, response time 6-12
msec
a = A (Dual PNP Output) -or- C (40-20Ma Analog o/p w/ Single PNP
Output)
45PVA-1LEB1-F4
45PVA-1LEB2-F4
45PVA-1LEB3-F4
45PVA-1LEB4-F4
45AST-1JPB1-A2
b = Process Connection:
A1 (1/4 inch NPT – Male), A2 (1/2 inch NPT – Male)
A3 (G1/4 BSPP), A4 (G1/2 BSPP)
c = Probe Length: A3 (30mm) -or- A2 (100mm)
Arrays
Part Verification Array, 5 Optical axes, 100 mm Detection width
Part Verification Array, 5 Optical axes, 225 mm Detection width
Part Verification Array, 5 Optical axes, 300 mm Detection width
Part Verification Array, 5 Optical axes, 375 mm Detection width
2 dimensional array, 5 Optical Axis, 0.5-2m, 4ms response time, PNP
Output type
45AST-1JPB2-A2
2 dimensional array, 10 Optical Axis, 150-800 mm, 8ms response,
100mm sensing height, PNP
45AST-1JNB2-A2
2 dimensional array, 10 Optical Axis, 150-800 mm, 8ms response,
100mm sensing height, PNP
45AST-1JPB4-A2
2 dimensional array, 10 Optical Axis, 150-800 mm, 8ms response,
150mm sensing height, PNP
45AST-1JNB4-A2
2 dimensional array, 10 Optical Axis, 150-800 mm, 8ms response,
150mm sensing height, PNP
141A-B
1492-SPabccc
140M-bcd-eee
140M-bcd-eee
Circuit Protection
141 Mounting System
1492-SP Supplementary Protector / Miniature Circuit Breaker
a = Number of Poles (1, 2, or 3)
b = Trip Curve :
B (Resistive or Slightly Inductive), C (Inductive), D (Highly Inductive)
ccc = Continuous Current Rating (ccc * 0.1 = Amp)
140M Motor Protection Circuit Breaker
b = C (25A), D (25A), F (45A), I (205A), J (250A), L (400A and 600A)
c = 2 (normal break), 8 (High Break)
d = E (adj thermal/fixed mag- 13 x in) ,
T (adj thermal/fixed mag- fixed at 16-20 x in)
eee = rated operational current
A (op. current *0.10) – A16 = 0.16
B (op. current *1.0) – B16 = 1.6
C (op. current *10) – C16 = 16.0
140M Motor Circuit Protectors
b = C (25A), D (25A), F (45A), H (125A), J (250A),
L (400A and 600A), N (800A and 1200A)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 115 of 143
1492-FB1C30
1492-FB1C30-L
c = 2 (normal break), 8 (High Break)
d = N (Fixed mag- 13 x in), P (adj mag only - less than 13 x in – MCPs),
R (adj mag only - greater than 13 x in)– MCPs)
eee = rated operational current A (op. current *0.10) – A16 = 0.16
B (op. current *1.0) – B16 = 1.6
C (op. current *10) – C16 = 16.0
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class CC, 30A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class CC,
30A
1492-FB1C30-D1
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (LED), 24 VDC
Class CC, 30A
1492-FB1C30-D2
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (LED), 48 VDC
Class CC, 30A
1492-FB2C30
1492-FB2C30-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 2 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class CC, 30A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 2 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class CC,
30A
1492-FB3C30
1492-FB3C30-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 3 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class J, 30A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 3 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class J,
30A
1492-FB1J30
1492-FB1J30-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class L, 30A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class J,
30A
1492-FB2J30
1492-FB2J30-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 2 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class J, 30A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 2 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class J,
30A
1492-FB3J30
1492-FB3J30-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 3 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class J, 30A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 3 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class J,
30A
1492-FB1J60
1492-FB1J60-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class L, 60A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 1 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class J,
60A
1492-FB2J60
1492-FB2J60-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 2 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class J, 60A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 2 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class J,
60A
1492-FB3J60
1492-FB3J60-L
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 3 Pole, w/o Blown Fuse indicator, Class J, 60A
Din Rail Fuse Holder, 3 Pole, w Blown Fuse indicator (neon), Class J,
60A
700DC-PHabc
Relays and Contactors
DC Tandem Contact Cartridge
a = 1 (1 N.O, 2pole.), 2 (2 N.O., 2pole), 3 (3 N.O., 4pole), 4 (4 N.O.,
4pole),
= 5 (6 N.O., 6pole), 6* (6 N.O., 6pole)
b = 00 (Open type relay rail mount), 00D (Open Type DIN rail mount), 01
(Type 1 General Purpose)
700-ab
c = Z24 (24 V)
* not available in Type 1 General Purpose
AC Tandem Contact Cartridge, Open Type with Pneumatic Time-Delay
attachment
a = -PPTb (only time delay contacts, relay rail mount), -PPTDb (only time
delay contacts, DIN mount)
= -PT200b (2 N.O, relay rail mount), -PT400b (4 N.O., relay rail mount),
= -PT200Db (2 N.O, DIN rail mount), -PT400Db (4 N.O., DIN rail
mount),
b = B11 (110-115V, 50Hz), A1 (115-120V, 60Hz), A2 (230-240V, 60Hz),
B2 (230-240V, 50Hz),
700-ab
= B3 (380V, 50Hz), A4 (460-480V, 60Hz)
DC Tandem Contact Cartridge, Open Type with Pneumatic Time-Delay
attachment
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 116 of 143
a = -PPKb (only time delay contacts, relay rail mount), -PPKDb (only time
delay contacts, DIN mount)
= -PKT200b (2 N.O, relay rail mount), -PKT400b (4 N.O., relay rail
mount),
= -PKT200Db (2 N.O, DIN rail mount), -PKT400Db (4 N.O., DIN rail
mount),
700-PLab
b = Z24 (24 V)
AC Mechanical Latching Relay, Open Type
a = 200 (2 N.O, relay rail mount), 400 (4 N.O., relay rail mount), 600 (6
N.O., relay rail mount)
= 200D (2 N.O, DIN rail mount), 400D (4 N.O., DIN rail mount), 600D
(6 N.O., DIN rail mount)
b = B11 (110-115V, 50Hz), A1 (115-120V, 60Hz), A2 (230-240V, 60Hz),
B2 (230-240V, 50Hz),
700DC-PLab
= B3 (380V, 50Hz), A4 (460-480V, 60Hz)
DC Mechanical Latching Relay, Open Type
a = 200 (2 N.O, relay rail mount), 400 (4 N.O., relay rail mount), 600 (6
N.O., relay rail mount)
= 200D (2 N.O, DIN rail mount), 400D (4 N.O., DIN rail mount), 600D
(6 N.O., DIN rail mount)
700-PB20
700-PBK20
700-PB40
700-PBK40
700-PC20
700-PCK20
700-PC40
700-PCK40
700-CPa
b = Z24 (24 V)
Adder Deck, Second Deck, 10 A, 2 pole, 2 N.O.
Adder Deck, Second Deck, 20 A, 2 pole, 2 N.O.
Adder Deck, Second Deck, 10 A, 4 pole, 4 N.O.
Adder Deck, Second Deck, 20 A, 4 pole, 4 N.O.
Adder Deck, Third Deck, 10 A, 2 pole, 2 N.O.
Adder Deck, Third Deck, 20 A, 2 pole, 2 N.O.
Adder Deck, Third Deck, 10 A, 4 pole, 4 N.O.
Adder Deck, Third Deck, 20 A, 4 pole, 4 N.O.
Contact Cartridges (Convertible from N.O. to N.C. and N.C. to N.O.
a = 1 (standard, 10A), 11Z (Overlap, AC-10A, DC-5A), M (Master, 20A),
= R (Logic Reed, 150VAC-0.5A, 30VDC-0.2A), S (Safety, 10A, meets
IEC 947-5)
700-PSaA1
Solid State Timers
a = ON DELAY, internal potentiometer: A (0.1-2s), B (0.4-8s), C (1.530s), D (6-120s)
= OFF DELAY, internal potentiometer: P (0.1-2s), R (0.4-8s), T (1.530s), U (6-120s)
= ON DELAY, external potentiomter: RA (0.1-2s), RB (0.4-8s), RC
(1.5-30s), RD (6-120s)
= OFF DELAY, external potentiomter: RP (0.1-2s), RR (0.4-8s), RT
(1.5-30s), RU (6-120s)
700-N3a
700-Na
700DC-Pab
700-Caabbbcc
100-aabb
Remote Potentiometer
a = 4 (0.1-2s), 5 (0.4-8s), 6 (1.5-30s), 7 (6-120s)
Pneumatic Time Delay Unit: 1 N.O. + 1 N.C., range 0.1-60s,
a = T (10A), KT (20A)
DC Mechanical Latch
a = LL10b (10 A), KLL10b (20A)
b = Z24 (24 V)
several accessories available
Relays, 4 pole (6 and 8 poles available)
aa = F (Standard contacts), FB (Gold Plated Bifurcated), FM (Master
Contacts)
bbb = 220 (2 N.O.+2 N.C.), 310 (3 N.O.+1 N.C.), 400 (4 N.O.+0 N.C.),
040 (0 N.O.+4 N.C., not for DC)
cc = DJ (24 VDC, 50, 60 Hz)
Auxiliary Contacts
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 117 of 143
aa = FA (Standard Contact) or FAM (Bifurcated contacts)
bb = 02 (0 N.O.+ 2 N.C.), 11 (1 N.O.+ 1 N.C.), 20 (2 N.O.+ 0 N.C.),
= 04 (0 N.O.+4 N.C.), 13 (1N.O.+3N.C.), 22 (2N.O.+2N.C.), 31
(3N.O.+1N.C.), 40 (4 N.O+0 N.C.)
100-FPTabb
100-ETAa
Pneumatic Timing Module after delay time
a = A (On Delay, with AC coils) or B (Off Delay)
bb = 30 (Delay 0.3 - 30 s range) or 180 (Delay 1.8 - 180 s range)
Electronic Timing Module after On-Delay time
a = 3 (0.1-3 s), 30 (1-30 s), 180 (1-180 s) : 700-CF 110-240 VAC or 110250VDC coils
ZJ3 (0.1 -3 s), ZJ30 (1-30 s), ZJ180 (10-180 s): 700-C with 24-48 VDC
coils
100-ETBa
Electronic Timing Module after Off-Delay time
a = KJ3 (0.3-3 s), KJ30 (1-30 s), KJ180 (10-180 s) : 700-CF 24VDC coils
3 (0.3 -3 s), 30 (1-30 s), 180 (10-180 s): 700-CF with 110-240 VAC
coils
100-FL11aa
100-JE
100-FSaaa
Mechanical Latch
aa = J (24 V), D (110-120V), B (480 V)
DC Interface (electronic) between DC (PLC) and AC operating
mechanism
(Input18 -30VDC, Output 110-240VAC)
Surge Suppressors,
aaa = C48 (RC Module, AC Operating, 24-48V, 50/60 Hz) with 700-CF all
coils
= C280 (RC Module, AC operating, 110-280V, 50/60 Hz), with 100-C
AC coils
= C480 (RC Module, AC operating, 380-480V, 50/60 Hz), with 100-C
AC coils
700-HC22Z24
= V55 (Varistor, 12-77 VDC) with 700-C all
= V136 (Varistor, 56-136 VAC, 78-180V DC) with 700-C all
= V575 (Varistor, 278-575 VAC), with 700-C all
= D250 (Diode, 12-250 VDC), with 100-C DC coils
More Coil Voltage options available
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 24VDC Coil Voltage,
2PDT, 2-pole, 2 Form C Contacts, 10A = AgNi Contacts. Contact Rating
10A, C300, R300.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HC22A24
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 24VAC Coil Voltage,
2PDT, 2-pole, 2 Form C Contacts, 10A = AgNi Contacts. Contact Rating
10A, C300, R300.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HC22A24
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 120VAC Coil Voltage,
2PDT, 2-pole, 2 Form C Contacts, 10A = AgNi Contacts. Contact Rating
10A, C300, R300.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HC14A24
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 24VAC Coil Voltage,
4PDT, 4-pole, 4 Form C Contacts, 7A = AgNiAu Gold Plated Contacts.
Contact Rating 7A.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HC14A1
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 120VAC Coil Voltage,
4PDT, 4-pole, 4 Form C Contacts, 7A = AgNiAu Gold Plated Contacts.
Contact Rating 7A.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 118 of 143
700-HC14Z24
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 24VDC Coil Voltage,
4PDT, 4-pole, 4 Form C Contacts, 7A = AgNiAu Gold Plated Contacts.
Contact Rating 7A.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HC24A24
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 24VAC Coil Voltage,
4PDT, 4-pole, 4 Form C Contacts, 7A = AgNi Silver Plated Contacts.
Contact Rating 7A, C300, R300.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HC24A1
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 120VAC Coil Voltage,
4PDT, 4-pole, 4 Form C Contacts, 7A = AgNi Silver Plated Contacts.
Contact Rating 7A, C300, R300.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HC24Z24
700-HC Miniature Square Base “Ice Cube” Relay, 24VDC Coil Voltage,
4PDT, 4-pole, 4 Form C Contacts, 7A = AgNi Silver Plated Contacts.
Contact Rating 7A, C300, R300.
Add -3-4 suffix to part number for Push-to-Test and LED Option. Add 4 for LED Option.
700-HN103
Screw Terminal Socket — Panel or DIN Rail Mounting; Guarded Terminal
Construction. Ith = 10 A per pole. 14-Blade miniature socket for use with
Bulletin 700-HC Relays.
700-HN104
Screw Terminal Socket – Panel or DIN Rail Mounting. Guarded Terminal
Construction Ith = 10 A per pole. 14-blade miniature socket for use with
Bulletin 700-HC relays. This socket has coil and contact separation as
well as the ability to plug in optional plug in modules (700-A**
accessories: LED, Surge Suppression, Timing Modules)
700-HN128
Screw Terminal Base Socket — Panel or DIN Rail Mounting; Open Style
Construction Ith = 10 A per pole. 14-Blade miniature socket for use with
Bulletin 700-HC Relays.
700-HN114
Retainer Clip Catalog Number for 700-HN103, 700-HN104 or 700-HN128
sockets
700-HN124
700-ADLa
Retainer Clip Catalog Number for 700-HN104 sockets
Diode with LED Surge Suppressor, used with 700-HN104 socket
a = 1 (6-24VDC), 2 (28-60VDC), 3 (110-220VDC)
Varistor with LED Surge Suppressor, used with 700-HN104 socket
a = 1 (6-24VAC) or 3 (110-240VAC)
RC Surge Suppressor, used with 700-HN104 socket
a = 1 (6-24VAC/DC) or 2 (110-240VAC/DC)
Time Module, used with 700-HN104 socket
a = 1 (On-Delay, Voltage range 12-24VAC/DC) or 2 (One Short,
Voltage range 12-24VAC/DC)
700-AVaR
700-ARa
700-ATa
700-HB32A24
More Coil Voltage options available
700-HB Square Base Relay, DPDT, 2-pole, 2 Form C, Single AgCdO
Contact, 15A B300 Contacts, Coil Voltage 24VAC
700-HB32A1
700-HB Square Base Relay, DPDT, 2-pole, 2 Form C, Single AgCdO
Contact, 15A B300 Contacts, Coil Voltage 120VAC
700-HB32Z24
700-HB Square Base Relay, DPDT, 2-pole, 2 Form C, Single AgCdO
Contact, 15A B300 Contacts, Coil Voltage 24VDC
700-HB33A24
700-HB Square Base Relay, 3PDT, 3-pole, 3 Form C, Single AgCdO
Contact, 15A B300 Contacts, Coil Voltage 24VAC
700-HB33A1
700-HB Square Base Relay, 3PDT, 3-pole, 3 Form C, Single AgCdO
Contact, 15A B300 Contacts, Coil Voltage 120VAC
700-HB33Z24
700-HB Square Base Relay, 3PDT, 3-pole, 3 Form C, Single AgCdO
Contact, 15A B300 Contacts, Coil Voltage 24VDC
700-HN153
Screw Terminal Socket — Panel or DIN Rail Mounting. Guarded Terminal
Construction
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 119 of 143
11-blade socket for use with Bulletin 700-HB and -HJ relays and -HS
timing relays. Order must be for 10 sockets or multiples of 10. Safe
separation between coil and contacts.
700-HN154
Screw Terminal Base Socket — Panel or DIN Rail Mounting. Open Style
Construction
11-blade for use with Bulletin 700-HB and -HJ relays and -HS timing
relays.
700-HN158
700-HN156
700-ADR
Retainer Clip for 700-HN153 socket
Retainer Clip for 700-HN1534socket
Diode with Surge Suppressor, used with 700-HN153 socket, Voltage
Range 6-220VDC
700-ADLaR
Diode with LED Surge Suppressor, used with 700-HN153 socket, Voltage
Range
700-AVaR
700-ARa
700-ATa
700-HT3
a = 1 (6-24VDC), 2 (28-60VDC), 3 (110-220VDC)
Varistor with LED Surge Suppressor, used with 700-HN153 socket,
Voltage Range
a = 1 (6-24VDC) or 3 (110-220VDC)
RC Surge Suppressor, used with 700-HN153 socket
a = 1 (6-24VAC/DC) or 2 (110-240VAC/DC)
Time Module, used with 700-HN153 socket
a = 1 (On-Delay, Voltage range 12-24VAC/DC),
2 (One Short, Voltage range 12-24VAC/DC)
Multi-Function Multi-Range Time Module, Voltage Range 12-240VAC/DC,
used with 700-HN153 socket, Eight Timing Modes and Seven Timing
Ranges.
700-SCZY3Z25
Photocoupler, Zero Cross Function, LED Indicator, 3A @ 100-240VAC, 524VDC Input Control Voltage
700-SCZY2A1
Photocoupler, Zero Cross Function, LED Indicator, 2A @ 100-240VAC,
100-110VAC Input Control Voltage
700-SCZY3Z24
Phototriac, LED Indicator, 3A @ 100-240VAC, 24VDC Input Control
Voltage
700-SCNY3Z25
Photocoupler, LED Indicator, 3A @ 4-48VDC, 5-24VDC Input Control
Voltage
700-SCZNY3Z26
Photocoupler, Zero Cross Function, 3A @ 100-240VAC, 4-24VDC Input
Control Voltage
700-SCTN3Z24
700-SCNN3Z26
700-SCNN2Z25
700-HN103
Phototriac, 3A @ 100-240VAC, 24VDC Input Control Voltage
Photocoupler, 3A @ 4-48VDC, 4-24VDC Input Control Voltage
Photocoupler, 2A @ 5-110VAC, 5-24VDC Input Control Voltage
Screw Terminal Socket, Panel or DIN Rail Mounting, Guard Terminal
Construction
700-HN104
Screw Terminal Socket, Panel or DIN Rail Mounting, Guard Terminal
Construction, 14 blade miniature socket for use with 700-SC relays.
700-HN128
Screw Terminal Base Socket, Panel or DIN Rail Mounting, Open Style
Construction
199-DR1
700-AT1
700-AT2
700-HN144 series B
100-Caabbcc
DIN Rail Mounting Pack, 35 X 7.5mm, 1 meter long
ON-Delay Time Module, 12-24VAC/DC used with 700-HN153 socket
One Shot Timing Module, 12-24VAC/DC, used with 700-HN153 socket
Retainer Clip, secures relay in socket. Must be used with 700-SC.
IEC, Bulletin 100-C contactor, 3 pole with integrated diode, Non-reversing
aa = (Amp) where Amp rating can be 09, 12, 16, 23, 30, 37, 43, 60, 72,
85
100-Caabbccc
bb = DJ (50/60 Hz, 24VDC)
cc = 10 (1 N.O. + 0 N.C.) or 01 (0 N.O. + 1 N.C.)
IEC, Bulletin 100-C contactor, 4 pole with integrated diode, Non-reversing
aa = (Amp) where Amp rating can be 09, 12, 16, 23, 37, 85
bb = DJ (50/60 Hz, 24VDC)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 120 of 143
104-Caabbccc
100-CaAbc
ccc = 400 (4 N.O. + 0 N.C.), 300 (3 N.O. + 1 N.C.), 200 (2 N.O. + 2 N.C.)
IEC, Bulletin 104-C contactor, 4 pole with integrated diode, Reversing
aa = (Amp) where Amp rating can be 09, 12, 16, 23, 37, 85
bb = DJ (50/60 Hz, 24VDC)
ccc = 2 (2 N.O. + 2 N.C.), 20 (2 N.O. + 0 N.C.)
IEC, Bulletin 100-C auxiliary contact, max 4 contacts
a = F (Front Mount aux contact) or S (Side Mount aux contact)
b = 0,1,2,3,4 (N.O. contacts, max 4 including N.C. for Front, Max 2 for
Side.)
c = 0,1,2,3,4 (N.C. contacts, max 4 including N.O.for Front, Max 2 for
Side.)
100-FPTabb
100-ETAa
100-ETBa
100-MCAaa
100-FLaa
100-JE
100-FSaaa
100-Daabbcc
104-Daabbcc
100-Daabbcc
104-Daabbcc
100-DSa-b
example: 100CFA31 - Front Mount, 3 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Pneumatic Timing Module after delay time
a = A (On Delay, with AC coils) or B (Off Delay)
bb = 30 (Delay 0.3 - 30 s range) or 180 (Delay 1.8 - 180 s range)
Electronic Timing Module after On-Delay time
a = 30 (1-30 s), 180 (1-180 s), ZJ30 (1-30 s) : 100-C with DC coils or 700CF with 24-48 VDC coils
ZJ3 (0.1 -3 s), ZJ30 (1-30 s), ZJ180 (10-180 s): 100-C with DC coils
Electronic Timing Module after Off-Delay time
a = KJ3 (0.3-3 s), KJ30 (1-30 s), KJ180 (10-180 s) : 100-C09..C37 with
AC coils
3 (0.3 -3 s), 30 (1-30 s), 180 (10-180 s): 100-C with AC coils
Mechanical Interlocks
aa = 00 (only without aux contact) or 02 (Mechanical/electrical with 2
N.C.) for all 100-C coils
Mechanical Latch
aa = J (24 V), D (110-120V), B (480 V)
DC Interface (electronic) between DC (PLC) and AC operating
mechanism
(Input18 -30VDC, Output 110-240VAC)
Surge Suppressors,
aaa = V55 (Varistor, 12-77 VDC)
= V136 (Varistor, 56-136 VAC, 78-180V DC) with 100-C all
= D250 (Diode, 12-250 VDC), with 100-C DC coils
IEC, Bulletin 100-D contactor, 3 pole AC Operated, Non-reversing
aa = (Amp) where Amp rating can be 95, 110, 140, 180,
210, 250, 300, 420, 630, 860A)
bb = D (50/60 Hz, 120 VAC), B (60 Hz, 480 VAC), J (50/60 Hz, 24VDC)
cc = 00 (0 N.O. + 0 N.C.), 11 (1 N.O. + 1 N.C.)
IEC, Bulletin 104-D contactor, 3 pole AC Operated, Reversing
aa = (Amp) where Amp rating can be 95, 110, 140, 180,
210, 250, 300, 420, 630, 860A)
bb = D (50/60 Hz, 120 VAC), B (60 Hz, 480 VAC), J (50/60 Hz, 24VDC)
cc = 24 (2 N.O. + 4 N.C.)
IEC, Bulletin 100-D contactor, 3 pole DC Operated, Non-reversing
aa = (Amp) where Amp rating can be 95, 110, 140, 180,
210, 250, 300, 420, 630, 860A)
bb = D (50/60 Hz, 120 VAC), B (60 Hz, 480 VAC), J (50/60 Hz, 24VDC)
cc = 00 (0 N.O. + 0 N.C.), 11 (1 N.O. + 1 N.C.)
22 (2 N.O. + 1/1L N.C.)
IEC, Bulletin 104-D contactor, 3 pole DC Operated, Reversing
aa = (Amp) where Amp rating can be 95, 110, 140, 180,
210, 250, 300, 420, 630, 860A)
bb = D (50/60 Hz, 120 VAC), B (60 Hz, 480 VAC), J (50/60 Hz, 24VDC)
cc = 24 (2 N.O. + 4 N.C.), 24L (2 N.O. + 2/2L N.C.)
100-D/104-D Aux contacts
aa = 1 (Left or Right Inside Mounting)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 121 of 143
100-DFSCa
100-DFSVa
193a-Ebbcd
193-EPx
592EECT
592EEDT
592EEEC
592EEEC
592EEFC
592EEGD
193-Eaabc
2 (Left or Right Outside Mounting)
bb = 11 (1N.O. + 1 N.C.), L11 (1N.O. + 1L N.C.), 20 (2 N.). + 0 N.C.)
B11 (Electronic compatible aux contact)
100-D Contactor Suppressor Module, RC Module
a = 48 (21-48V 50Hz/24V-55V 60Hz)
110 (95-110V 50Hz/110V-127V 60Hz)
240 (180-277V 50Hz/208V-277V 60Hz)
550 (380-550V 50Hz/440V-600V 60Hz)
100-D Contactor Suppressor Module, Varistor Module
a = 55 (21-48V 50Hz/24V-55V 60Hz)
136 (55-136V)
277 (137-277V)
575 (278-600V)
IEC E1 Solid State Overload Relay
a = 193 (3Ø), 193R (3Ø, Cage Clamp), 193S (1Ø)
bb = ED1(fixed trip Class 10), EE (Selectable Trip Class 10, 15, 20, 30)
c = A - G (3Ø, 0.1-0.5, 0.2-1, 1-5, 3.2-16, 5.4-27, 9-45, 19-90A),
P-U (1Ø, 1-5, 3.2-16, 5.4-27, 9-45, 18-90A)
d = B (C09..C23 contactor size), D (C30..C43 contactor size), E
(C60..C85 contactor size)
DIN Rail/Panel Adapter
x = B (for 193-ED1_B, 193EE_B), D (for 193-EE_D), E (for 193-EE_E)
Starter, Motor, Overloads, Solid State, Range 1.5 A - 4.5 A
Starter, Motor, Overloads, Solid State, Range 3.0A - 9.0A
Starter, Motor, Overloads, Solid State, Range 6.0A - 18.0A
Starter, Motor, Overloads, Solid State, Range 9.0A - 27.0A
Starter, Motor, Overloads, Solid State, Range 15.0A - 45.0A
Starter, Motor, Overloads, Solid State, Range 30.0A - 90.0A
E3 and E3 Plus Solid State Overload Relay-Electronic Motor Protection
Relays, 3Ø or 1Ø
aa = C1(2 inputs, 1 output), C2 (4 inputs, 2 outputs, built-in Ground Fault)
b = P (0.4-2A), Z (0-5000A),
A-L (1-5, 3-15, 5-25, 9-45, 18-90, 28-140, 42-210, 60-302, 84-420,
125-630, 172-860A),
c = B (C09..C23 contactor size), D (C30..C43 contactor size), E
(C60..C85 contactor size),
F (C95..D180 contactor size), G (D210..D420 contactor size), H
(D630-D860 contactor size),
193-ECPMx
193-PCT
193-EIMD
825-CBCT
DIN Rail/Panel Adapter for E3 and E3 Plus
x = 1 (for 193-EC_B, 193EE_B), 2 (for 193-EC_D), 3 (for 193-EC_E)
Programming Control Terminal for E3 and E3 Plus
AC Input Interface Module for 110/120V AC control circuitry
Core Balance Ground Fault sensor
Accessories available for Terminal Blocks, Terminal Lugs, Terminal
Covers, and Phase Barriers
193T-ABxx
Starter, Motor, Overload Relay, Bi-metallic, Single Phase Sensitivity
- Range 0.6 - 1.0 Amps
xx = 10 (0.6 - 1.0 A), 16 (1.0-1.6 A), 24 (1.6 - 2.5 A), 40 (2.5 - 4.0 A), 60
(4.0 - 6.0 A),
193T-ACxx
Starter, Motor, Overload Relay, Bi-metallic, Single Phase Sensitivity
- Range 0.6 - 1.0 Amps
xx = 10 (6 - 10 A), 16 (10-16 A), 24 (16 - 24 A), 30 (18-13 A), 45 (30 - 45
A)
193TCCxx
Starter, Motor, Overload Relay, Bi-metallic, Single Phase Sensitivity
xx = 30 (18 - 30A), 45 (30-45A), 60 (45-60A), 75 (60-75A)
Starter, Motor, Overload Relay, Bi-metallic, Single Phase Sensitivity
-Range 63 - 80 Amps
193TDC90
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 122 of 143
193TAPM
Starter, Motor, Overload Relay, Mounting Kit For LRxD2 Type, Snap-On,
DIN Rail or Screw Mount Centers
193TCPM
Starter, Motor, Overload Relay, Mounting Kit For LRxD3 Type, Snap-On,
DIN Rail or Screw Mount Centers
Accessories available include Anti-tamper shield, current adjustment
shield, Remote Reset solenoid,
193EC2AB
Starter, Motor, Electronic Overload For Direct Connect to 100 Contactors
193ECPM1
193EEHF
Starter, Motor, DIN Rail Adapter
Starter, Motor, Overload Relay, Bi-metallic, Single Phase Sensitivity
-Range 90 - 120 Amps
Molded Case Circuit Breaker - Range 15 - 1200 Amps
b = H (125A), J (250A), K (400A), Q (600A), M (800A), and N (1200A)
c = 2 (20-29kA), 3 (30-39kA), 5 (50-59kA), 6 (60-69kA), 8 (80-89kA), and
0 (>= 100kA)
140U-bcdefgh
d = C (Fixed Thermal/Fixed Magnetic), D (Fixed Thermal/Adjust
Magnetic),
E (Adjust Thermal/Adjust Magnetic), F (Adjust Thermal/Adjust
Magnetic),
G (Electronic –Long, Short, Ground Fault), H (Electronic – Long,
Short, High Instant),
I (Electronic (Long, Short, High Instant, Ground Fault), L (Electronic
– Long and Short time),
S (Molded Case Switch – isolator)
e = 3 pole
f = C (10 rr, A), D (100 rr0, A), E (1000 rr00 A)
g = Internal Control Modules
A (1 Aux contact), B (2 Aux contacts), D (1 Alarm contact), F (1 Aux +
1 Alarm contact),
G (Under voltage release only), P (Shunt trip only)
Control Module Combinations
H (1 Aux + under voltage release), J (2 Aux + under voltage release),
L (1 Aux + 1 Alarm + under voltage release), N (1 Alarm + under
voltage release),
Q (1 Aux + shunt trip), R (2 Aux + shunt trip), T (1 Aux + 1 Alarm +
shunt trip),
V (1 Alarm + shunt trip)
h = Voltage Code description: reference Rockwell Automation
documentation
140U-G-RM12B
Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Variable-Depth Rotary Operating
Mechanism, Type 1/3/3R/4/4X/12 Rotary Handle, 12 in operating rod,
Black Handle
140U-G-RM12R
Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Variable-Depth Rotary Operating
Mechanism, Type 1/3/3R/4/4X/12 Rotary Handle, 12 in operating rod,
Red Handle
140U-G-PL
140-U-G-DRA2
Padlock Kit, Padlocking Hasp, Lock-OFF only
DIN Rail Adapter, allows 2-pole G-Frame MCCB to mount to 35 mm DIN
rail, 2 poles
140-U-G-DRA3
DIN Rail Adapter, allows 2-pole G-Frame MCCB to mount to 35 mm DIN
rail, 1 poles
140U-H1C1-Caa
Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Single Pole, 25kA at 240V, 18kA at 277V
aa = rated current (15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90)
Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Single Pole, 25kA at 240V, 18kA at 277V
aa = rated current (10 = 100A, 11 = 110A, 12 = 125A)
Disconnects
ROTARY, FUSED DISCONNECT
1Ø 115,230V - 3Ø 200,230,460,575V
140U-H1C1-Daa
194R-Nxxx0P3
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 123 of 143
xxx = A20 (30A, Fuse BS88A1), A30 (60A, Fuse BS88A3),
= C03 (30A, Fuse 30A Class CC)
= J03 (30A, Fuse 30A Class J), J06 (60A, Fuse 30A Class J), J10
(100A, Fuse 30A Class J)
194R-Nxxx0P3
194R-HSx
1Ø 230V - 3Ø 200,230,460,575V
xxx = H10 (100A,Fuse 100AHRCII-C), H20 (200A,Fuse 200AHRCII-C),
H40 (400A,Fuse 400AHRCII-C),
= J20 (200A, Fuse 200A Class J), J40 (400A, Fuse 400AHRCII-C)
Rotary Handles
With Defeater
x = 1 (Black/Grey, IP42, w/ Defeater available), 4 (IP66,w/ Defeater
available)
= 1E (Red/Yellow, IP42 w/o Defeater available), 4E (Red/Yellow, IP66
w/o Defeater available)
194R-HMx
Standard Orientation With Defeater
x = 1 (Black/Grey, IP42, w/ Defeater available), 4 (IP66,w/ Defeater
available)
= 1E (Red/Yellow, IP42 w/o Defeater available), 4E (Red/Yellow, IP66
w/o Defeater available)
194R-HMx-N1
90 Degree Orientation With Defeater
x = 1 (Black/Grey, IP42, w/ Defeater available), 4 (IP66,w/ Defeater
available)
= 1E (Red/Yellow, IP42 w/o Defeater available), 4E (Red/Yellow, IP66
w/o Defeater available)
194R-Rx
Operating Shaft,
x =1 (263 mm),2 (457mm), 3 (200mm), 4 (403mm), 5 (278mm), 6
(532mm)
194R-R1M*
Operating Shaft 263 mm, use with 194R HM** and 194R 30 A or 60 A
switch
194R-R2M*
Operating Shaft 457 mm, use with 194R HM** and 194R 30 A or 60 A
switch
194R-NxyyyP34zz
194R-HSG1
194R-R1G
194R-R3G
194R-SC1
194R-HAIRPIN
194R-FCA2
194R-FCJ60
194R-FCC1
194R-FCC2
194R-FCD1
194R-FCE1
194R-FCF1
194R-LNCx
199-LE1
199-LF1
199-LG1
199-LH1
UL/CSA Disconnect Switch Kits, Fused (Non Fused available)
30 A, 200V, 230V, 460V, 575V, 30A Class J Fuse, Black/Grey
x = J (Class J Fuse), C (Class CC Fuse - only 30 A)
yyy = 030 (30A), 060 (60A), 100 (100A), 200 (200A), 400 (400A)
zz = R1 (30A or 60A, Black/Grey) or ER1 (30A or 60A, Red/Yellow)
= R3 (100A or 200A, Black/Grey) or ER3 (100A or 200A, Red/Yellow)
= R5 (400A, Black/Grey) or ER5 (400A, Red/Yellow)
Operating Shaft Guide
Shaft Guard, Dim reference A1,A2,B1,B2
Shaft Guard, Dim reference C1,C2,D1,D2
Operating Shaft Coupler - use with 194R-R1 and 194R-R2
Cotter Pin for 194R-R1or 194R-R2 Shaft
Fuse Cover
Fuse Cover
Fuse Cover
Fuse Cover
Fuse Cover
Fuse Cover
Fuse Cover
Terminal Shield, x = 1 - 6
Terminal Lug - For 194R-NH100P3 only
Terminal Lug - For 194R-NJ200P3, -NN200P3, -NA400P3
Terminal Lug
Terminal Lug
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 124 of 143
194R-AA
195-GA10
195-GA01
195-GA11
195-GA20
195-GA02
194R-A1
194R-P1
194RF-aabb
194RF-abcde
Auxiliary Contact Adaptor
Auxiliary Contact 1N.O.
Auxiliary Contact 1N.C.
2 pole Auxiliary Contact 1N.O./ 1N.C.
2 pole Auxiliary Contact 2N.O.
2 pole Auxiliary Contact 2N.C.
Auxiliary support for 5…8 circuits per switch
Disconnect Switch Padlocking kit
194RF Internal Handle with Mechanical Interlock
194RF Internal Handle/Interlock Kit, Frame Size NFPA 79 Kit
aa = 30 (30 A), 60 (60A), 100 (100A), 200 (200A), 400 (400A)
bb = R1 (10.3” Shaft Length), R2 (18” Shaft Length), R3 (7.9” Shaft
Length),
R5 (10.9” Shaft Length
194RF Pre-assembled Switch with Handle and NFPA79 Internal
Handle/Interlock
a = N (Open), F (Type 3/4/12 Painted Steel), C (Type 4/4X Stainless
Steel)
1494V-bccc-d
b = C (CC Fuse 30A), J (J Fuse 30-400A), N (Non-Fused)
c = 30 (30 A), 60 (60A), 100 (100A), 200 (200A), 400 (400A)
d = R1 (10.3” Shaft Length), R2 (18” Shaft Length)
e = 4 (Type 4/4X, Black), 4E (Type 4/4X, Red/Yellow)
FUSIBLE, 250V & 600V (other options available)
Variable Depth Flange Mounted Disconnect
b = Right Hand Mechanism:
DN (non-fusible), DH (Class H fuse clips), DJ (Class J fuse clips),
DR (Class R fuse clips)
Left Hand Mechanism
DNX (non-fusible), DHX (Class H fuse clips), DJX (Class J fuse
clips,
DRX (Class R fuse clips)
ccc = Non Fusible : 30A – 600A
Fusible : 2xx (250V) –or- 6xx (600V)
x3x (30A switch), x6x (60A switch), x1x (100A switch),
x2x (200A switch),
x4x (400A switch), x6x (600A switch),
xx3 (30A clips), xx6 (60A clips), xx1 (100A clips), xx2
(200A clips),
xx4 (400A clips), xx6 (600A clips)
d = Accessories (-d –d –d)
A (Long connecting Rod), B (Stainless Steel Handle), D (Line &
Load lugs),
E (Protective Fuse Cover), F (1 N.O. contact), FF (2 N.O.
contacts),
G (1N.C. contact), GG (2 N.C. contacts), H (1 N.O. and N.C.
Electrical interlock),
1494V-DR233
1494V-DJ666
HH (2 N.O. and N.C. Electrical interlock)
EXAMPLES:
Disconnect, Panel, Flange, 30Amp - 250 Volt, Fused Class R
Disconnect, Panel, Flange, 60Amp - 600 Volt, Fused Class J
STANDARD SIZE ENCLOSED, CLASS H FUSE CLIPS, 3 POLE (other
options available)
1494GxF3H2420
1494GxF3H6420
Disconnect, Safety 250 Volt, Fused With (1NO-1NC) Contact
x = B (30Amp), C (60Amp), D (100Amp), E (200Amp)
Disconnect, Safety 600 Volt, Fused With (1NO-1NC) Contact
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 125 of 143
1494GxF3N420
IEC Load Switches
194E-Axxx-175y
194L-HExy-175
IEC Load Switch Accessories
194E-x-Pyy
194E-xyyy-NP
194E-A32-P3
194E-xyyy-TN
194E-G3660
194E-G3661
194E-G3662
194E-xx-Cy
194L-G2830
x = B (30Amp), C (60Amp), D (100Amp), E (200Amp)
Disconnect, Safety 600 Volt, Fused With (1NO) Contact
x = B (30Amp), C (60Amp), D (100Amp), E (200Amp)
Base Mounted 25 … 100A
(Front mounted, 3 pole-2 position, 3 pole-3 position optional)
Off-On Mounted, SW (Including Operating Shaft) 25A
xxx = 25 (25A), 40 (40A), 63 (63A), 80 (80A), 100 (100A)
y = 3 (3 pole), 6 (6 pole)
Screw-Mounting handles (22mm Mounting for Front Mount available)
Off-On Base/Frt Mount, Rotary SW Operator Handle (Lockable,
Red/Yellow, 25-100A)
x = 6 (25-100A) or 8 (40-100A)
y = G (Red/Yellow) or N (Black/Grey)
25 … 100A
LoadSwitch
x = A (For 194E-A...), E (For 194E-E…)
yy = 11 (1 N.O.+1 N.C.), L11 (1 N.O.+1 N.E.L.B.), 22 (2 N.O.+2 N.C.),
D10 (1 N.O.E.B.)
Additional Pole, 1 N.O.
x = A (For 194E-A...), E (For 194E-E…)
yyy = 32 (32A), 40 (40A), 63 (63A), 80 (80A), 100 (100A)
Earthing/Grounding Terminal
x = A (For 194E-A...), E (For 194E-E…)
yyy = 32 (25,32 A), 63 (40,63 A), 100 (80, 100A)
Neutral Terminal
x = A (For 194E-A...), E (For 194E-E…)
yyy = 32 (25,32 A), 63 (40,63 A), 100 (80, 100A)
6-Pole Mechanical Coupling - For 194E-25/32
6-Pole Mechanical Coupling - For 194E-40/63
6-Pole Mechanical Coupling - For 194E-80/100
Terminal Cover, - For 194E-E...
xx = 32 (25,32 A), 63 (40,63 A), 100 (80, 100A)
y = 3 (3 poles), 4 (4 poles)
Interlock Shaft for Base Mount, 44mm, Plastic, Qty 5 (Front Mount
available)
194E-G3687
Interlock Shaft for Base Mount, 44mm, Metal, Qty 5 (Front Mount
available)
194L-G3194
Interlock Shaft for Base Mount, 52mm, Plastic, Qty 5 (Front Mount
available)
194E-G3707
Interlock Shaft for Base Mount, 52mm, Metal, Qty 5 (Front Mount
available)
194L-G3195
Interlock Shaft for Base Mount, 57mm, Plastic, Qty 5 (Front Mount
available)
194L-G3393
194L-G3394
IEC Load Switches
Metal Shaft Extension, 90mm-235mm
Metal Shaft Extension, 230mm-350mm
Base Mounted 125 … 315A, w/Box Lugs, w/Bolt-on Wiring
(Front Mounting w/Box Lugs, w/Bolt-on Wiring available)
Base Mounting w/Box Lugs, 3 pole, 2 position, 125A
Base Mounting w/Box Lugs, 3 pole, 2 position,160A
Base Mounting w/Box Lugs, 3 pole,2 position, 250A
Base Mounting w/Box Lugs, 4 pole,2 position, 315A
Base Mounting w/Bolt-on Wiring, 3 pole, 2 position, 250A
Base Mounting w/Bolt-on Wiring, 3 pole, 2 position, 315A
Base Mounting w/Box Lugs, 3 pole, 2 position, 160A
Base Mounting w/Bolt-on Wiring, 4 pole, 2 position, 160A
Base Mounting w/Bolt-on Wiring, 4 pole, 2 position, 250A
Base Mounting w/Bolt-on Wiring, 4 pole, 2 position, 315A
194E-A125-1753
194E-A160-1753
194E-A250-1753
194E-A315-1754
194E-B250-1753
194E-B315-1753
194E-E160-1753
194E-F160-1754
194E-F250-1754
194E-F315-1754
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 126 of 143
Screw-Mounting handles, Off-On Base/Frt Mount, Rotary SW Operator
Handle
194E-HE8N-175
194E-HE13N-175
194E-HE8G-175
194E-HE13G-175
194E-AB-P21-160
Lockable, Red/Yellow, 125-315A, 90mmX90mm
Lockable, Red/Yellow, 125-315A, 135mmX135mm
Lockable, Black/Grey, 125-315A, 90mmX90mm
(Lockable, Black/Grey, 125-315A, 135mmX135mm
Auxiliary Contacts - 2N.O. / 1N.C. - For use with 194E-A125-160, 194EB125-160
194E-AB-P21-315
Auxiliary Contacts - 2N.O. / 1N.C. - For use with 194E-A250-315, 194EB250-315
194E-EF-P21-160
Auxiliary Contacts - 2N.O. / 1N.C. - For use with 194E-E125-160, 194EF125-160
194E-EF-P21-315
Auxiliary Contacts - 2N.O. / 1N.C. - For use with 194E-E250-315, 194EF250-315
194E-AE160-PE
194E-AE315-PE
194E-BF160-PE
194E-BF250-PE
194E-BF315-PE
194E-AE160-TN
194E-AE315-TN
194E-BF160-TN
194E-BF250-TN
194E-BF315-TN
194E-AB40
Earthing/Grounding Terminal - For 194E-A125-160, 194E-E125-160
Earthing/Grounding Terminal - For 194E-A250-315, 194E-E250-315
Earthing/Grounding Terminal - For 194E-B125-160, 194E-F125-160
Earthing/Grounding Terminal - For 194E-B250, 194E-F250
Earthing/Grounding Terminal - For 194E-B315, 194E-F315
Neutral Terminal - For 194E-A125-160, 194E-E125-160
Neutral Terminal - For 194E-A250-315, 194E-E250-315
Neutral Terminal - For 194E-B125-160, 194E-F125-160
Neutral Terminal - For 194E-B250, 194E-F250
Neutral Terminal - For 194E-B315, 194E-F315
Shaft Extension - For 194E-A or 194E-B 125…315A Base Mounted
Switches
194E-AE125-C1
194E-AE250-C1
194E-BF125-C1
194E-BF250-C1
Terminal Cover - For 194E-A125-160 or 194E-E125-160
Terminal Cover - For 194E-A250-315 or 194E-E250-315
Terminal Cover - For 194E-B125-160 or 194E-F125-160
Terminal Cover - For 194E-B250-315 or 194E-F250-315
Transformers
Control Circuit Transformer
a = A (63VA), B (80VA), C (130VA), D (200VA), E (250VA), F (350VA),
G (500VA), H (750VA),
1497-a-b-c-d
J (800VA), K (1000VA), L (1600VA), M (2000VA)
b = M1 (240V, 208V primary ; 120V (60Hz) secondary),
M2 (240V, 208V primary ; 24V (60Hz) secondary),
M3 (240V, 208V primary ; 24V, 120V (60Hz) secondary),
M4 (415V, 400V, 380V primary ; 115V, 230V (50Hz) secondary),
M4 (415V, 400V, 380V primary ; 24V (50Hz) secondary)
c = Fuse Block Options: 0 (0 primary, 0 Secondary), 1 (0 primary, 1
Secondary),
2 (2 primary, 0 Secondary), 3 (2 primary, 1
Secondary)
1497B-a-b-c-d
d = N (No Secondary Fuse, No Cover)
Control Circuit Transformer
a = A1 (50VA), A2 (75VA), A3 (100VA), A4 (150VA), A5 (200VA), A6
(250VA),
A7 (300VA), A9 (500VA), A10 (750VA), A11 (1000VA), A12
(1500VA),
A13 (2000VA), A14 (3000VA)
b = M11 (600/575/550V primary ; 120Vx 240V (60Hz) secondary),
M12 (120Vx240V primary ; 120Vx240V (60Hz) secondary),
M13 (120Vx240V primary ; 24V (60Hz) secondary),
M14 (240Vx480V primary ; 120Vx240V(60Hz) secondary),
M15 (380/400/416V primary ; 115Vx230V (60Hz) secondary)
M16 (240Vx480V primary ; 24V (60Hz) secondary
M17 (208Vx240V primary ; 24V (60Hz) secondary)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 127 of 143
c = Fuse Block Options: 0 (0 primary, 0 secondary), 1 (0 primary, 1
secondary),
2 (2 primary, 0 secondary),
3 (2 primary, 1
secondary)
1497D-a-b-c-d
d = N (No Taps)
Control Circuit Transformer
a = A1 (50VA), A2 (75VA), A3 (100VA), A4 (150VA), A5 (200VA), A6
(250VA),
A9 (500VA), A10 (750VA), A11 (1000VA), A12 (1500VA), A13
(2000VA),
1606-XLE80E
A14 (3000VA)
b = M10 (240x480V primary; 120/240V (60Hz) secondary)
M11 (600V primary ; 120V/240V (60Hz) secondary),
M14 (240Vx480V primary ; 120V/240V(50/60Hz) secondary),
M20 (208V primary ; 120V/240V (60Hz) secondary),
M21 (480V primary ; 120V/240V (60Hz) secondary,
M22 (480V primary ; 120V/240V (50/60Hz) secondary),
M23 (600V primary ; 120V/240V (50/60Hz) secondary),
M24 (480V primary ; 208V (60Hz) secondary),
c = Fuse Block Options: 0 (0 primary, 0 secondary)
d = 2 (two 5% taps below rated primary volts)
22 (2.5% taps: 2 above and 2 below rated primary volts)
4 (Four 2.5% taps below rated primary volts)
N (No Taps)
Power Supplies
XLE Essential Single Phase, 80W, 3.3A, 10A slow blow fuse or 1489A1C100/20A, DIN RAIL; Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-120VAC, 200-240VAC;
Output Voltage: 24-28VDC
1606-XLE120E
XLE Essential Single Phase, 120W, 5.0A, 10A slow blow fuse or 1489A1C100/20A, DIN RAIL; Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-120VAC, 200-240VAC;
Output Voltage: 24-28VDC
1606-XLE240E
XLE Essential Single Phase, 240W, 10A, 10A slow blow fuse or 1489A1C100/20A,
DIN RAIL; Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-120VAC, 200-240VAC; Output Voltage:
24-28VDC
1606-XLSDNET4
Performance, 91W, 3.8 Amp, 6A slow blow fuse or 1492-SPU1C060/20A;
1606-XLSDNET8
Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-240VAC, 110-300VDC; Output Voltage: 24VDC
Performance, 192W, 8 Amp, 6A slow blow fuse or 1492-SPU1C060/20A;
1606-XLS80E
Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-240VAC, 110-300VDC; Output Voltage: 24VDC
Performance, 80W, 3.4 Amp, 6A slow blow fuse or 1492-SPU1C060/20A;
Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-240VAC, 110-300VDC; Output Voltage: 24-28VDC
1606-XLS120E
Performance, 120W, 5 Amp, 6A slow blow fuse or 1492-SPU1C060/20A;
Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-240VAC, 110-300VDC; Output Voltage: 24-28VDC
1606-XLS240E
Performance, 240W, 10 Amp, 6A slow blow fuse or 1492SPU1C060/20A;
Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-240VAC, 110-300VDC; Output Voltage: 24-28VDC
1606-XLS480E
Performance, 480W, 20 Amp, 6A slow blow fuse or 1489-A1C060/20A;
Input Voltage: 1Ø,100-240VAC, 110-300VDC; Output Voltage: 24-28VDC
1606-XLS480E-3
Performance, 480W, 20 A, 6A (*3) slow blow fuse or 1492-SP3C060;
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 128 of 143
1606-XLB
1606-XLS240-UPS
1609-U500NH
Input Voltage: 3Ø, 380-480VAC, 600VDC; Output Voltage: 24-28VDC
Back of panel bracket for 1606-XLS products
1606 Uninterruptible Power Supply, 240W, 10A, DC
7.5Ah or 26Ah Battery for 1606-XLS240-UPS available as accessories
500VA (325W), 115AC, 0-50°, without Network Management Card, DIN
RAIL mount
1609-U500NH-C
500VA (325W), 115AC, 0-50°, with Network Management Card, DIN
RAIL mount
1609-U500EH
500VA (325W), 230AC, 0-50°, without Network Management Card, DIN
RAIL mount
1609-U500EH-C
500VA (325W), 230AC, 0-50°, with Network Management Card, DIN
RAIL mount
1609-P3000N
1609-P3000A
1609-P8000E
1607-XT50D1A
1607-XT100D1A
3000VA (2100W), 120AC, 0-50°, with Network Management Card
3000VA (2100W), 230AC, 0-50°, with Network Management Card
8000VA (6400W), 230AC, 0-50°, with Network Management Card
ArmorPower 100…240V AC, 100…353V DC, 48 W, 2A, <25A inrush
ArmorPower 100…240V AC, 100…353V DC, 91.2 W, 3.8A, <25A inrush
1492-Jxy
Terminal Blocks
Feed Through Terminal Block
x = 3 (24A), 4 (32A), 6 (41A) for IEC 800V AC/DC,
x = 10 (57A), 16(76A), 35 (125A), 50 (150A), 70 (192A) for IEC 1000V
AC/DC
y = BLANK (grey), -RE (red), - B (blue), -BL (black), -G (green), -Y
(yellow), OR (orange), -BR (brown), -W (white)
1492-JG2Q
Feed Through Grounding Block with 2 connection on each side, 1.5mm^2
1492-JG3
1492-JG3TW
Feed Through Grounding Block, 2.5mm^2
Feed Through Grounding Block with 2 connection on each side, 2.5mm^2
1492-JGx
1492-JDG3
Feed Through Grounding Block, x=4,6,10,16,35,50,70 (xmm^2)
2 Circuit with one feed through and one ground, Grounding Block,
2.5mm^2
1492-JDG3C
1492-JKD3
2 Circuit commoned Grounding Block, 2.5mm^2
Knife Disconnect Feed Through Isolation Block, Grey, IEC 500V AC/DC,
24A
1492-JKD3TP
Knife Disconnect Feed Through Isolation Block with test plug, Grey, IEC
500V AC/DC, 24A
199-DR1
Steel Mounting Rails (available in Aluminum, Hi-rise Sym Steel, and Hirise Sym Aluminum)
1492-EBJxy
End Barrier, x = 3 or 16 ( For 1492-J16, -J35)
y = BLANK (grey), B (blue), Y (yellow)
Screwless End Retainer - For 1492-J3,-J4,-J6,-J10, grounding blocks
End Anchor, DIN - Normal Duty- For 1492-J3,-J4,-J6,-J10, grounding
blocks
1492-ERL35
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-CJJ5-n
End Anchor, DIN - Heavy Duty, grounding blocks
Screw Center jumper for 24A. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 4, 3,
or 2
1492-CJJ6-n
Screw Center jumper for 32A. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 4, 3,
or 2
1492-CJJ8-n
Screw Center jumper for 41A. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 4, 3,
or 2
1492-CJJ10-n
Screw Center jumper for 57A. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 4, 3,
or 2
1492-CJJ12-n
Screw Center jumper for 76A. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 4, 3,
or 2
1492-CJJ16-n
Screw Center jumper for 125A. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 4, 3,
or 2
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 129 of 143
1492-CJJ18-n
Screw Center jumper for 150A. Replace n with number of poles: 4, 3, or
2
1492-CJJ20-n
Screw Center jumper for 192A. Replace n with number of poles: 4, 3, or
2
1492-CJLJ5-n
Plug-in Center jumper for 24A. Replace n with number of poles: 50, 10,
9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2
1492-CJLJ6-n
Plug-in Center jumper for 32A. Replace n with number of poles: 41, 10,
4, 3, 2
1492-SJ5B-n
Insulated Side jumper for 24A. Replace n with number of poles: 24 or 10
1492-T1
1492-EBJ16
1492-PPJD3
1492-TPS23
1492-TPS23L
1492-TPS4L
1492-TPaa
Screw Type Jumper Notching Tool
Partition Plate - For 1492-J3,-J4,-J6,-J10
Partition Plate - For 1492-J16,-J35
Test Plug Socket - For 1492-J3
Test Plug Socket - For 1492-J4,-J6,-J10
Test Plug Socket - For 1492-J16,-J35
Test Plug –
aa = 23 (For 1492-J3,-J4,-J6,-J10) -or- 40 (For 1492-J16,-J35)
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-J3, -J4
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-J6, -J10
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-J16, -J35
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-J50, -J70
Feed Through Terminal Block, GREY, for IEC 800V AC/DC
x=2 (17.5A, IEC 500VAC), 3 (24A), 4 (32A), 6 (41A),10 (57A), 16(76A),
35 (125A)
1492-EWPJ5
1492-EWPJ8
1492-EWPJ12
1492-EWPJ18
1492-Lxy
y = BLANK (grey), -RE (red), - B (blue), -BL (black), -G (green), -Y
(yellow), OR (orange), -BR (brown), -W (white)
1492-LGx
1492-LDG2
Feed Through Grounding Block, x= 2 (1.5mm^2), 3 (2.5mm^2), 4
(4mm^2), 6 (6mm^2),
10 (10mm^2), 16 (16mm^2), 35 (35mm^2)
2 Circuit with one feed through and one ground, Grounding Block,
1.5mm^2
1492-LDG3
2 Circuit with one feed through and one ground, Grounding Block,
2.5mm^2
1492-LDG4
2 Circuit with one feed through and one ground, Grounding Block, 4mm^2
199-DR1
Steel Mounting Rails (available in Aluminum, Hi-rise Sym Steel, and Hirise Sym Aluminum)
1492-EBLx
1492-EBLx-B
1492-EBLx-Y
1492-ERL35
1492-EAJ35
1492-EAHJ35
1492-CJL4-n
End Barrier, Grey, x=2,3,4,6,10,16
End Barrier, Blue, x=2,3,4,6,10,16
End Barrier, Yellow, x=2,3,4,6,10,16
Screwless End Retainer
End Anchor, DIN - Normal Duty
End Anchor, DIN - Heavy Duty
Plug-In center jumper 1492-L2. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 5, 4,
3, or 2
1492-CJK5-n
Plug-In center jumper 1492-L3. Replace n w/ number of poles: 50, 10, 9,
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2
1492-CJK6-n
Plug-In center jumper 1492-L4. Replace n with number of poles: 10, 9, 8,
7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2
1492-CJK8-n
Plug-In center jumper 1492-L6. Replace n with number of poles: 32, 4, 3,
or 2
1492-CJKL12-2
1492-CJKL16-2
1492-TPL4
1492-TPL5
1492-TP23
1492-TPL6
Plug-In center jumper 1492-L16
Plug-In center jumper 1492-L35
Test Plug - For 1492-L2
Test Plug - For 1492-L3
Test Plug - For 1492-L4, -L10, -L16, -L35
Test Plug - For 1492-L4
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 130 of 143
1492-TPL8
1492-EWPL4
1492-EWPL5
1492-EWPL6
1492-EWPL8
1492-EWPL10
1492-EWPL12
1492-EWPL16
1492-GM35
1492-M3X12
1492-M5X10
1492-M6X10
1492-M6X12
1492-M7X12
1492-xxx
Test Plug - For 1492-L6
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-L2
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-L3
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-L4
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-L6
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-L10
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-L16
Electrical Warning Plate - For 1492-L35
Group Marking Carrier
Snap in Marker Card - For 1492-L2
Snap in Marker Card - For 1492-L3
Snap in Marker Card - For 1492-L4
Snap in Marker Card - For 1492-L6, -L10
Snap in Marker Card - For 1492-L16, -L35
Screw Connection Terminal Block, IEC 500V AC/DC
xxx = WM3 (24 A), WM4 (32 A), WMD1 (17.5 A)
y = BLANK (grey), -RE (red), - B (blue), -BL (black), -G (green), -Y
(yellow), OR (orange),
-BR (brown), -W (white)
1492-DR3
1492-EBM3
1492-EBM4
1492-EBMD1
1492-ERL15
1492-EAJ15
1492-SJM5-10
1492-N42
1492-SJ6-10
1492-SJMD5-12
1492-CJM5-n
Mounting Rails
End Barrier -For 1492-WM3…
End Barrier -For 1492-WM4…
End Barrier -For 1492-WMD1…
End Anchor
Mini DIN Anchor
10-pole side jumper-For 1492-WM3…
2-pole side jumper -For 1492-WM4…
10-pole side jumper -For 1492-WM4…
12-pole insulated side jumper -For 1492-WMD1…
Center jumper -For 1492-WM3…. Replace n with numer of poles: 10, 3,
or 2
1492-CJD6-n
Center jumper-For 1492-WM4…. Replace n with numer of poles: 50, 10,
5, 4, 3, or 2
1492-PPM3
1492-PPMD1
1492-MS5X5
1492-MS6X9
1492-MP5*
Partition Plate -For 1492-WM3… or -For 1492-WM4…
Partition Plate -For 1492-WMD1…
Snap in Marker Card -For 1492-WM3… and -For 1492-WMD1…
Snap in Marker Card -For 1492-WM4…
Individual Marker Tab -For 1492-WM3… and -For 1492-WMD1…
* Contact Rockwell Automation for assistance
Individual Marker Tab: * please contact Rockwell Automation for
assistance
1492-MP*
1492-WMG3
1492-WMG4
1491R125
1491R125
1491R126
1491N333
1491N521
1492-PD3C111
1492-PD3C141
1492-PD3C112
Single-circuit Mini grounding terminal block: Metallic
Single-circuit Mini grounding terminal block: Green/Yellow
Block, Fuse, Class R, 2 Pole, 600 Volt, 30Amp
Block, Fuse, Class R, 3 Pole, 600 Volt, 30Amp
Block, Fuse, Class R, 3 Pole, 600 Volt, 30Amp
Block, Fuse, Class J, 3 Pole, 61-100Amp
Block, Fuse, Class J, 3 Pole, 600 Volt, 201-400Amp
Power Terminal Block, 3 Pole, 150 A, Copper Connectors
Line wire range: 1/0 - #16 , Lines per Pole: 1
Load wire range:: #4 - #14, Lines per Pole: 4
Power Terminal Block, 3 Pole, 175 A, Copper Connectors
Line wire range: 2/0 - #14 , Lines per Pole: 1
Load wire range:: #4 - #14, Lines per Pole: 4
Power Terminal Block, 3 Pole, 255 A, Copper Connectors
Line wire range: 250 MCM - #6 , Lines per Pole: 1
Load wire range:: 250 MCM - #6, Lines per Pole: 1
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 131 of 143
1492-PD3C263
1492-PD3C163
1492-PD3C2127
1492-PD3C287
1492-PDE1ab
1492-PDECa
1492-SM5X10
1492-PDL3111
Power Terminal Block, 3 Pole, 350 A, Copper Connectors
Line wire range: 2/0 - #14 , Lines per Pole: 2
Load wire range:: #4 - #14, Lines per Pole: 6
Power Terminal Block, 3 Pole, 380 A, Copper Connectors
Line wire range: 500 MCM - #4 , Lines per Pole: 1
Load wire range:: #2 - #14, Lines per Pole: 6
Power Terminal Block, 3 Pole, 760 A, Copper Connectors
Line wire range: 500 MCM - #4 , Lines per Pole: 2
Load wire range:: #2 - #14, Lines per Pole: 12
Power Terminal Block, 3 Pole, 760 A, Copper Connectors
Line wire range: 500 MCM - #4 , Lines per Pole: 2
Load wire range:: #4 - #14, Lines per Pole: 8
Enclosed Power Terminal Block, 1 pole, Amps (Cu Wire) 75°
a = blank (aluminum terminals) -or- C (copper terminals)
b = 111 (175A, Line conductor 0.38” dia, Load 0.38” dia)
141 (175A, Line conductor 0.38” dia, Load 0.38” dia)
225 (510A, Line conductor 0.72” dia, Load 0.72” dia)
183 (335A, Line conductor 0.94” dia, Load 0.50” dia)
183 (335A, For copper Line conductor 0.72” dia, Load 0.50” dia)
Enclosed Power Terminal Block corresponding hole plug
a = 1 (1492-PDE1111 or –PDE1C111, Line and Load)
1 (1492-PDE1141 or –PDE1C141, Line)
2 (1492-PDE1141 Load)
2 (1492-PDE1182 or –PDE1C183 Load)
3 (1492-PDE1225 or –PDE1C25, Line and Load)
3 (1492-PDE1C183, Line)
4 (1492-PDE1183 Line)
Enclosed Power Terminal Block Markers, 100 makers/card, 5 cards
Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks, Line AWG = 2/0-6Cu, Load AWG =
2/0-6Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 200A, Class RK1 = 200A, Class
RK5 = 100A
1492-PDL3141
Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks, Line AWG = 2/0-6Cu, Load AWG =
4-14Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 200A, Class RK1 = 200A, Class
RK5 = 100A
1492-PDL3161
Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks, Line AWG = 2/0-6Cu, Load AWG =
4-14Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 200A, Class RK1 = 200A, Class
RK5 = 100A
1492-PDL31S1
Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks, Line AWG = 2/0-6Cu, Load AWG =
2/0-6Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 200A, Class RK1 = 200A, Class
RK5 = 100A
1492-PDL3163
Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks,
Line AWG = 400-3/0Cu, Load AWG = 2-8Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 400A, Class RK1 = 400A, Class
RK5 = 200A
Line AWG = 2/0-2Cu, Load AWG = 2-14Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 200A, Class RK1 = 200A, Class
RK5 = 100A
1492-PDL3194
Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks,
Line AWG = 600-3/0Cu, Load AWG = 1/0-8Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 600A, Class RK1 = 400A, Class
RK5 = 200A
Line AWG = 2/0-2Cu, Load AWG = 2-14Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 200A, Class RK1 = 200A, Class
RK5 = 100A
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 132 of 143
1492-PDL31124
Enclosed Power Distribution Blocks,
Line AWG = 600-3/0Cu, Load AWG = 4-8Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 600A, Class RK1 = 400A, Class
RK5 = 200A
Line AWG = 2/0-2Cu, Load AWG = 4-14Cu,
Over Current Max Amp Fuse: Class J 200A, Class RK1 = 200A, Class
RK5 = 100A
889N-abc-*F
Connection Systems
16 AWG, STOOW PVC cordset
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), U (straight Male), V (Right
Male)
b = 2 (2-Pin, 600V 13A), 3 (3-Pin, 600V 13A), 4 (4-Pin, 600V 10A),
5 (5-Pin, 600V 8A), 6 (6-Pin, 600V 8A)
c = For 2-Pin and 3-Pin:
AFC (Color Code A-US), AFA (Color Code B-Auto),
For 4-Pin and 5-Pin:
AFC (Color Code A-US), AFA (Color Code B-Auto), AF (Color Code
C-IEC),
For 6-Pin:
AFC (Color Code C-IEC), AF (Color Code A-US)
* = 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F2AFC-6F (cordset, straight Female, 2-Pin, Color CodeUS, 6ft cable)
889N-ab-*F
16 AWG, STOOW PVC patchcord
a = FbAFNU (straight Female, straight Male), FbAFNV (straight Female,
Right Male),
RbAFNU (right female, straight Male), RbAFNV (Right Female, Right
Male)
b = 2 (2-Pin, 600V 13A), 3 (3-Pin, 600V 13A), 4 (4-Pin, 600V 10A),
5 (5-Pin, 600V 8A), 6 (6-Pin, 600V 8A)
* = 3 (3ft), 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F2FNU-6F (patchcord, straight Female, straight male, 2Pin, 6ft cable)
889N-abc-*F
18 AWG, PVC cordset
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), U (straight Male), V (Right
Male)
b = 2 (2-Pin, 300V 10A), 3 (3-Pin, 300V 10A), 4 (4-Pin, 300V 7A),
5 (5-Pin, 300V 5.6A), 6 (6-Pin, 300V 5.6A)
c = For 2-Pin and 3-Pin:
AEC (Color Code A-US), AEA (Color Code B-Auto),
For 4-Pin and 5-Pin:
AEC (Color Code A-US), AEA (Color Code B-Auto), AE (Color Code
C-IEC),
For 6-Pin:
AE (Color Code A-US)
* = 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F2AFE-6F (cordset, straight Female, 2-Pin, Color CodeUS, 6ft cable)
889N-ab-*F
18 AWG, PVC patchcord
a = FbAENU (straight Female, straight Male), FbAENV (straight Female,
Right Male),
RbAENU (right female, straight Male), RbAENV (Right Female, Right
Male)
b = 2 (2-Pin, 300V 10A), 3 (3-Pin, 300V 10A), 4 (4-Pin, 300V 7A),
5 (5-Pin, 300V 5.6A), 6 (6-Pin, 300V 5.6A)
* = 3 (3ft), 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F2FNU-6F (patchcord, straight Female, straight male, 2Pin, 6ft cable)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 133 of 143
889N-abHFC-*F
16 AWG, ToughLink (TPE) cordset, Color Code A-US
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), U (straight Male), V (Right
Male)
b = 3 (3-Pin, 600V 13A), 4 (4-Pin, 600V 10A),
5 (5-Pin, 600V 8A)
* = 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F3HVC-6F (TPE cordset, straight Female, 3-Pin, Color
Code-US, 6ft)
889N-ab-*F
16 AWG, ToughLink (TPE) patchcord
a = FbHFNU (straight Female, straight Male), FbHFNV (straight Female,
Right Male),
RbHFNU (right female, straight Male), RbHFNV (Right Female, Right
Male)
b = 3 (3-Pin, 600V 13A), 4 (4-Pin, 600V 10A), 5 (5-Pin, 600V 8A)
* = 3 (3ft), 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F3HFNU-6F (patchcord, straight Female, straight male, 3Pin, 6ft cable length)
889N-abHJA-*F
18 AWG, ToughLink (TPE) cordset, Color Code B-AUTO
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), U (straight Male), V (Right
Male)
b = 3 (3-Pin, 300V 10A), 4 (4-Pin, 300V 7A), 5 (5-Pin, 300V 5.6A)
* = 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F3HJA-6F (TPE cordset, straight Female, 3-Pin, Color
Code-AUTO, 6ft)
889N-ab-*F
18 AWG, ToughLink (TPE) patchcord
a = FbHJNU (straight Female, straight Male), FbHJNV (straight Female,
Right Male),
RbHJNU (right female, straight Male), RbHJNV (Right Female, Right
Male)
b = 3 (3-Pin, 300V 10A), 4 (4-Pin, 300V 7A), 5 (5-Pin, 300V 5.6A)
* = 3 (3ft), 6 (6ft), 12 (12ft), 20 (20ft)
example 889N-F3HJNU-6F (patchcord, straight Female, straight male, 3Pin, 6ft cable length)
888N-ab-cF
888N-ab-cF
16 AWG Receptacles, 1/2 in 14 NPT, External Threads
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), M (straight Male), E (Right
Male)
b = 2AF1 (2-pin, Color Code A-US, 600VAC/DC, 13A),
3AF1 (3-pin, Color Code A-US, 600VAC/DC, 13A),
3AFA1 (3-PIN, Color Code B-AUTO, 600VAC/DC, 13A),
4AF1 (4-PIN, Color Code A-US, 600VAC/DC, 10A),
4AFA1 (4-PIN, Color Code B-AUTO, 600VAC/DC, 10A),
4AFE1 (4-PIN, Color Code C-IEC, 600VAC/DC, 8A),
5AF1 (5-PIN, Color Code A-US, 600VAC/DC, 10A),
5AFA1 (5-PIN, Color Code B-AUTO, 600VAC/DC, 10A),
5AFE1 (5-PIN, Color Code C-IEC, 600VAC/DC, 10A),
6AF1 (6-PIN, Color Code A-US, 600VAC/DC, 10A)
c = 1 or 3 (1ft or 3ft)
18 AWG Receptacles, 1/2 in 14 NPT, External Threads
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), M (straight Male), E (Right
Male)
b = 2AE1 (2-pin, Color Code A-US, 300VAC/DC, 10A),
3AE1 (3-pin, Color Code A-US, 300VAC/DC, 10A),
3AEA1 (3-PIN, Color Code B-AUTO, 300VAC/DC, 10A),
4AE1 (4-PIN, Color Code A-US, 300VAC/DC, 7A),
4AEA1 (4-PIN, Color Code B-AUTO, 300VAC/DC, 7A),
4AEE1 (4-PIN, Color Code C-IEC, 300VAC/DC, 5.6A),
5AE1 (5-PIN, Color Code A-US, 300VAC/DC, 5.6A),
5AEA1 (5-PIN, Color Code B-AUTO, 300VAC/DC, 5.6A),
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 134 of 143
889N-L3AFA-*F
889N-F4AD-C5F
889N-33PB-N4KF
889N-43PB-N4KF
889N-P1N5-MN5KF
889A-NADPT
889A-U1NUT-10
889A-U1FSL-10
889D-abc-d
5AEE1 (5-PIN, Color Code C-IEC, 300VAC/DC, 5.6A),
6AE1 (6-PIN, Color Code A-US, 300VAC/DC, 5.6A),
c = 1 or 3 (1ft or 3ft)
LED Cordset, 3-Pin, 18 AWG, 300V, 6A, Color Code A, * = 6 (6ft), 12
(12ft), 20 (20ft)
Coiled Cordset, 4-Pin, 18 AWG, 300V, 5A, Color Code A
Mini T-Port, 300V, 8A, 3-Pin
Mini T-Port, 300V, 8A, 4-Pin
Mini T-Port, 300V, 8A, 5-Pin
mating components & accessories
Mounting nuts for 1/2" - 14 NPT threaded receptacles (qty 10)
Flat sealing washers for 1/2" - 14 NPT threaded receptacles (qty 10)
DC Micro cordset, Color Code A
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), M (straight Male), E (Right
Male)
b = 4 (4-Pin), 5 (5-Pin)
c = UC (PUR - Powertrain: good oil and chemical resistance, 22AWG,
250V, 4A),
HJ (TPE: good oil, chemical, and weld slag resistance, 4-Pin only,
18AWG, 250V, 4A),
889D-abc-d
HL (TPE, 4-Pin only, 22AWG, 250V, 4A)
d = 2, 5 or 10 (2m, 5m, or 10m)
DC Micro patchcord
a = FbcDM (straight Female, straight Male), FbcDE (straight Female,
Right Male),
RbcDM (right female, straight Male), RbcDE (Right Female, Right
Male)
b = 4 (4-Pin), 5 (5-Pin)
c = UC (PUR - Powertrain: good oil and chemical resistance, 22AWG,
250V, 4A),
HJ (TPE: good oil, chemical, and weld slag resistance, 4-Pin only,
18AWG, 250V, 4A),
889D-a4HC-d
889D-a-b
HL (TPE, 4-Pin only, 22AWG, 250V, 4A)
d = 2, 5 or 10 (2m, 5m, or 10m)
DC Micro cordset, ToughLink, Color Code A, 4-Pin, 22AWG, 250V, 3A
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female), M (straight Male), E (Right
Male)
d = 1, 2, 5 or 10 (1m, 2m, 5m, or 10m)
DC Micro ToughLink patchcord
a = F4HCDM (straight Female, straight Male), F4HCDE (straight Female,
Right Male),
R4HCDM (right female, straight Male), R4HCDE (Right Female, Right
Male)
888D-abACc-d
888D-abAEc-d
889D-B4AC-a
d = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (1m, 2m, 3m, 4m, 5m, or 6m)
DC Micro 22 AWG receptacles
a = F (female) or M (Male)
b = 3 (3-pin), 4 (4-pin), 5 (5-pin), 6 (6-pin)
d = 0M3 (0.3m) or 1 (1m)
DC Micro 18 AWG receptacles
a = F (female) or M (Male)
b = 4 (4-pin), 5 (5-pin)
d = 0M5 (0.5m) or 1 (1m)
LED cordset, 4-Pin, 22 AWG, 250V, 4A, Color Code A, PNP Straight
Female
889D-F4AD-C5F
a = 2, 5, or 10 (2m, 5m, or 10m)
Coiled Cordset, 4-Pin, 20 AWG, 250V, 4A, Color Code B, Straight
Female
889P-abc-d
Pico snap-on cordset, Color Code A, 24 AWG
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 135 of 143
a = S (straight Female), Z (Right Female), W (3-pin LED PNP), Y (3-pin
LED NPN)
889P-abc-d
889P-abcPd-e
b = 3 (3-Pin), 4 (4-Pin)
c = AB (3 or 4-pin, 60VAC, 75VDC, 4A, Yellow PVC: not for 3-pin LED),
UB (3 or 4-pin, 60VAC, 75VDC, 4A, Yellow PUR: not for 3-pin LED),
AB (3-pin LED, 10-30VDC, 4A, Yellow PVR),
UB (3-pin LED, 10-30VDC, 4A, Yellow PUR),
d = 2, 5 or 10 (2m, 5m, or 10m)
Pico screw-on cordset, Color Code A, 24 AWG
a = F (straight Female: not available in 3-pin LED), R (Right Female),
M (straight Male: Not available in 3-pin PUR or 3-pin LED),
E (Right Male: Not available in 3-pin PUR or 3-pin LED)
b = 3 (3-Pin), 4 (4-Pin)
c = AB (3 or 4-pin, 60VAC, 75VDC, 4A, Yellow PVC: not for 3-pin LED),
UB (3 or 4-pin, 60VAC, 75VDC, 4A, Yellow PUR: not for 3-pin LED),
AB (3-pin LED, 10-30VDC, 4A, Yellow PVR),
UB (3-pin LED, 10-30VDC, 4A, Yellow PUR),
d = 2, 5 or 10 (2m, 5m, or 10m)
Pico screw-on patchcord, Color Code A, 24 AWG, 60VAC / 75VDC, 3A,
QD
a = F (straight Female), R (Right Female)
b = 3 (3-Pin), 4 (4-pin)
c = AB (yellow PVC),
UB (yellow PUR),
d = M (straight male), M3 (4-pin straight female to 3-pin straight male), E
(right male)
e = 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 (1m, 2m, 3m, 5m, or 10m)
NOTE: limited offerings, please check with Rockwell Automation
documentation
888P-abAB4-c
898P-32YY-aM4
879PZ-a3bDM4-*
879PZ-F4ABDM4-*
879PZ-a3bDM4-*
889V-abc-*
889V-RZ3ab-*
Receptacles, 24AWG, 60VAC / 75 VDC, 4A, Color Code A
a = F (female) or M (male)
b = 3 (3-pin) or 4 (4-pin)
c = 0M3 (0.3m) or 1 (1m)
Splitters, Pico-Pico, DC Micro-Pico, 60VAC / 75VDC, 4A
a = P (standard wiring Pico-Pico), D (standard wiring Pico-DC Micro
V-Cables, 24 AWG, Pico-DC Micro, 3-pin
a = F (Straight Female) or R (Right Female)
b = AB (PVC jacket), UB (PUR jacket)
* = 0M3 (0.3m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), or 10 (10m)
V-Cables, 24 AWG, Pico-DC Micro, 4-pin straight female, PVC
* = 0M3 (0.3m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), or 10 (10m)
V-Cables, 24 AWG, Pico-DC Micro, 3-pin LED right female,
a = N (right Female, PNP) or N (right Female, NPN)
b = AB (PVC jacket), UB (PUR jacket)
* = 0M3 (0.3m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), or 10 (10m)
DIN Valve cordsets – Valve A (18mm), 2-pole + dual ground
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
c = DBE (18AWG Black PVC, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow)
DRD (20AWG Black PUR, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow)
* = 2 (2 m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
DIN Valve cordsets – Valve A (18mm), 3-pole + ground, 0-250VAC
Wiring: ground away from cable exit
a = G (Orientation: Ground away from cable exit)
A (Orientation: Ground towards cable exit)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 136 of 143
889V-abc-T
889V-RZ3a-T
889W-abc-*
c = BE (18AWG Black PVC, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow)
RD (20AWG Black PUR, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow)
* = 2 (2 m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve A (18mm), Screw-type, 2-pole +
ground
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
c = GCF (PG9 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GFF (PG11 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GNF (1/2”-NPT Cable Grip / Thread Size)
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve A (18mm), Screw-type, 3-pole +
ground, Straight Wired, 0-250 VAC/DC
a = GCF (PG9 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GFF (PG11 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GNF (1/2”-NPT Cable Grip / Thread Size)
DIN Valve cordsets – Valve B (11mm), 2-pole + ground
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
c = GBE (18AWG Black PVC, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow: Grnd away
from cable exit)
ABE (18AWG Black PVC, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow: Grnd towards
cable exit)
GRD (20AWG Black PUR, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow: Grnd away
from cable exit)
ARD (20AWG Black PUR, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow: Grnd towards
cable exit)
889W-abc-*
* = 2 (2 m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve B (11mm), Screw-type, 2-pole +
ground
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
C2 (230VAC/DC: LED & Varistor) – only for LED & Varistor option
c = GDF (PG7 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GCF (PG9 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GNF (1/2”-NPT Cable Grip / Thread Size) – only for Straight Wired
option
889Y-abc-*
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve BEU (10mm), Screw-type, 2-pole +
ground
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
C2 (230VAC/DC: LED & Varistor) – only for LED & Varistor option
c = GDF (PG7 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GCF (PG9 Cable Grip / Thread Size)
GNF (1/2”-NPT Cable Grip / Thread Size) – only for Straight Wired
option
889W-abc-*
DIN Valve cordsets – Valve C (18mm), 2-pole + ground
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 137 of 143
889Z-abGDE-T
889Z-RZ3GDE-T
889S-abGDE-T
889S-RZ3GDE-T
898D-aPT-b
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
c = DBD (20AWG Black PVC, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow)
DRD (20AWG Black PUR, Brown, Blue, Green/Yellow)
* = 2 (2 m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve C (9.4mm), Screw-type, 2-pole +
ground, PG7 Cable Grip / Thread Size
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve C (9.4mm), Screw-type, Straight
Wired, 3-pole + ground, PG7 Cable Grip / Thread Size, 250VAC /
300VDC
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve C (9.4mm), Screw-type, 2-pole +
ground, PG7 Cable Grip / Thread Size
a = R (Straight Wired)
L (LED & Varistor Surge Suppression)
b = Z2 (0-250VAC/DC: Straight Wired)
D2 (24VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
A2 (115VAC/DC: LED & Varistor)
C2 (230VAC/DC)
DIN Valve Field Attachable – Valve C (9.4mm), Screw-type, Straight
Wired, 3-pole + ground, PG7 Cable Grip / Thread Size, 250VAC /
300VDC
DC Micro Style distribution box, 4-pin, 10-30VDC, 3A, one signal per port
a = 54 (4 port, no LED), P54 (4 port with LED), 56 (6 port, no LED), P56
(6 port with LED),
889D-F4ACDM-a
889N-FaAF-b
1485A-M12
871A-TS4-PM
889P-M4DC-H
898D-aDT-Bb
58 (8 port, no LED), 58PT (8 port with LED)
b = N7 (with 4 port box), N9 (with 6 port box), N12 (with 8 port box)
Device patchcord, a = 1,2,3,5, or 10 (cable length in meters)
Main cordset-straight to conductor
a = replace a with number of pins in the main conductor
b = replace b with the length of cable in meters
Sealing caps
Field Attachable connectors
IDC Feld Attachable Connectors
DC Micro Style distribution box, 4-pin, 10-30VDC, 3A, two signals per
port
a = 54 (4 port, no LED), P54 (4 port with LED), 58 (8 port, no LED), P58
(8 port with LED),
889D-F4ACDM-a
879N-F4ACDM-a
1485A-M12
871A-TS4-DM
889P-M4DC-H
898D-aPT-T
b = 5 (5m cable) or 10 (10m cable)
Device patchcord, a = 1,2,3,5, or 10 (cable length in meters)
Device V-cables (straight)
a = replace a with the length of cable in meters
Sealing caps
Field Attachable connectors
IDC Feld Attachable Connectors
DC Micro Style terminal block distribution box, 4-pin, 10-30VDC,
2A/channel, one signal/port
a = 54 (4 port, no LED), P54 (4 port PNP LED), 58 (8 port, no LED), P58
(8 port PNP LED)
b = 5 (5m cable) or 10 (10m cable)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 138 of 143
889D-F4ACDM-a
1485A-M12
871A-TS4-DM
889P-M4DC-H
898P-PaPT-Bb
1485A-M12
889P-F3UBPM-a
871A-TS3-PM
889P-M3DC-H
1492-MS9X20
889D-R8AB-a
898P-PaPT-D8
889A-PMCAP
889D-R8ABDM-a
889P-F3UBPM-a
871A-TS3-PM
889P-M3DC-H
1492-MS9X20
898H-58PT-Ba
898H-P58PT-Ba
889A-HCC3
889D-F4UB-a
889D-F4AC-2
889D-R4AC-2
1485A-M12
1492-MS9X20
888H-T4DC3-0M3
1785-TR10BT
Device patchcord, a = 1,2,3,5, or 10 (cable length in meters)
Sealing caps
Field Attachable connectors
IDC Feld Attachable Connectors
Pico, 3-pin cable connector distribution box, PNP LED, 10-30VDC, 2A per
channel/6A total
a = 34 (4 port), 36 (6 port), 38 (8 port), 310 (10 port), 312 (12 port)
b = 5 (5m cable) or 10 (10m cable)
Sealing Caps for Pico Style 3-pin cable distribution box
Device PUR patchcord, 3-pin, a = 1,2,3,5, or 10 (cable length in meters)
Field Attachable connectors
IDC Feld Attachable Connectors
Labels
Device PUR cordset, 8-pin, Right Female
Pico Style DC Micro distribution box, PNP LED, 10-30VDC, 2A per
channel/6A total, 8-pin QD
a = 34 (4 port), 36 (6 port)
Sealing Caps for Pico Style DC Micro distribution box
DC Micro Homerun PUR patchcord, a = 1,2,3,5, or 10 (cable length in
meters)
Device PUR patchcord, 3-pin, a = 1,2,3,5, or 10 (cable length in meters)
Field Attachable connectors
IDC Feld Attachable Connectors
Labels
IDC Style distribution box, 8 port, No LED, 10-30VDC, 2A per
channel/10A total
a = 5 (5m cable) or 10 (10m cable)
IDC Style distribution box, 8 port, LED, 10-30VDC, 2A per channel/10A
total
a = 5 (5m cable) or 10 (10m cable)
3-pole IDC insert
DC Micro Device cordset,
a = 5 (5m cable) or 10 (10m cable)
Recommended cordset: 2m, 4-pin DC Micro (straight)
Recommended cordset: 2m, 4-pin DC Micro (Right angle)
Sealing Caps
Labels
4-Pin Straight Receptacle
Ethernet Media
Twisted Pair transceiver with an AUI interface to 10Mbit/s CSMA / CD
LAN (ISO/IEC 8802-3, 10BaseT) shielded cable.
1785-TR10BF
Fibor Optic transceiver with an AUI interface to 10Mbit/s CSMA / CD LAN
(ISO/IEC 8802-3, 10BaseT) shielded cable.
1785-TR10B2
Thin-wire, Twisted Pair transceiver with an AUI interface to 10Mbit/s
CSMA / CD LAN (ISO/IEC 8802-3, 10BaseT) shielded cable.
1785-TR10B5
Thick-wire, Twisted Pair transceiver with an AUI interface to 10Mbit/s
CSMA / CD LAN (ISO/IEC 8802-3, 10BaseT) shielded cable.
1788-MCHKR
Network MediaCenter, handheld diagnostic tool that analyzes EtherNet/IP
physical media
1788-EN2DN
1585D-M4TBDM-a
EtherNet/IP to DeviceNet linking device
Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset, TPE Flex, Male M12 D to Male M12 D,
a = length 0M3 (0.3m), 0M6 (0.6m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset, TPE Flex, Male M12 D to flying leads,
a = length 0M3 (0.3m), 0M6 (0.6m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset, RJ45 Insulation Displacement Connector
(IDC)
1585D-M4TB-a
1585J-M8CC-H
1585J-M8CC-C
1585J-MaTBJM-b
Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset, RJ45 Crimp Connector with Boot
Ethernet RJ45 cordset, Teal Robotic TPE, Flex rated
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 139 of 143
1585J-M8VBJM-b
a = 4 (four Conductors) -or- 8 (eight conductors)
b = length 0M3 (0.3m), 0M6 (0.6m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
Ethernet RJ45 cordset, Red Robotic TPE, Flex rated, 8 (eight conductors)
1585J-M8PBJM-b
b = length 0M3 (0.3m), 0M6 (0.6m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
Ethernet RJ45 cordset, Teal Riser PVC, standard rated, 8 (eight
conductors)
1585J-M8CC-H
b = length 0M3 (0.3m), 0M6 (0.6m), 1 (1m), 2 (2m), 5 (5m), 10 (10m)
Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset, RJ45 Insulation Displacement Connector
(IDC)
1585J-M8CC-C
150a-bcdefg
Ethernet 4-pin M12 cordset, RJ45 Crimp Connector with Boot
Motor Controllers
SMC Dialog Plus Smart Motor Controller – 460VAC: Open and NonCombination
a = blank (Solid-State Controller)
B (Solid-State Controller and Isolation Contactor –enclosed only)
b = B24 (24A, 1-15Hp), B35 (35A, 1-15Hp), B54 (54A, 1-40Hp), B97
(97A, 5-75HP),
B135 (135A, 5-100Hp), B180 (180A, 5-150Hp), B240 (240A, 5200Hp),
B360 (360A, 5-300Hp), B500 (500A, 4-400Hp), B650 (650A, 5500Hp),
B720 (720A, 5-600Hp), B850 (850A, 10-700Hp), B1000 (1000A, 10800Hp),
c = Enclosure Type:
N (Open), A (Type 1-IP30), F (Type 4 –IP65), J (Type 12 –
IP54), H (Type 3)
d = Input Line Voltage (3 phase, 50 and 60 Hz):
Open Type:
B (200-460VAC), C (200-575VAC),
Non-Combination Enclosed
H (200-208VAC), A(230VAC), B (200-460VAC), C (200575VAC),
e = Control Voltage:
D (100-240VAC), R (24VAC/DC)
f = Control Options
blank (standard), B (Pump Control), C (Preset Slow Speed),
D (SMB Smart Motor Braking), E (Accu-Stop), F (Slow Speed
with Braking)
15a-bcdefg
g = Options: 8L (Line-Mounted Protective Module)
8M (Load-Mounted Protective Module)
8B (Line- and Load-Mounted Protective Modules)
SMC Dialog Plus Smart Motor Controller – 460VAC: Combination
a = 2B (Solid-State Controller with Fusible Disconnect and Isolating
Contactor),
2H (Solid-State Controller with Fusible Disconnect),
3B (Solid-State Controller with Cirucit Breaker and Isolating Contactor
3H (Solid-State Controller with Cirucit Breaker)
b = B24 (24A, 1-15Hp), B35 (35A, 1-15Hp), B54 (54A, 1-40Hp), B97
(97A, 5-75HP),
B135 (135A, 5-100Hp), B180 (180A, 5-150Hp), B240 (240A, 5200Hp),
B360 (360A, 5-300Hp), B500 (500A, 4-400Hp), B650 (650A, 5500Hp),
B720 (720A, 5-600Hp), B850 (850A, 10-700Hp), B1000 (1000A, 10800Hp),
c = Enclosure Type:
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 140 of 143
A (Type 1-IP30), F (Type 4 –IP65), J (Type 12 – IP54), H (Type
3)
d = Input Line Voltage (3 phase, 50 and 60 Hz):
HD (200-208VAC), AD (230VAC), BD (200-460VAC), CD (200575VAC),
e = Control Options
blank (standard), B (Pump Control), C (Preset Slow Speed),
D (SMB Smart Motor Braking), E (Accu-Stop), F (Slow Speed
with Braking)
f = 39 (5Hp), 40 (7.5Hp), 41 (10Hp), 42 (15Hp), 43 (20Hp), 44 (25Hp), 46
(40Hp),
47 (50Hp), 48 (60Hp), 49 (75Hp), 50 (100Hp), 51 (125Hp), 52
(150Hp), 54 (200Hp),
56 (250Hp), 57 (300Hp), 58 (350Hp), 59 (400Hp), 60 (450Hp), 61
(500Hp),
150-FbbbcdRfg
72 (600Hp), 73 (700Hp), 65 (800Hp), 67 (1000Hp)
g = Options: 8L (Line-Mounted Protective Module)
8M (Load-Mounted Protective Module)
8B (Line- and Load-Mounted Protective Modules)
Standard SMC Flex Control Module, ratings at 460VAC, 24V Control
Voltage
bbb = 5 (5A, 3Hp), 25 (25A, 15Hp), 43 (43A, 30 Hp), 60 (60A, 40Hp), 85
(85A, 60Hp),
108 (108A, 75Hp), 135 (135A, 100Hp), 201 (201A, 150 Hp), 251
(251A, 200Hp,
317 (317A, 250Hp), 361 (361A, 300Hp), 480 (480A, 400Hp), 625
(625A,500Hp),
15aH-Fbbbcdefg
780 (780A, 600Hp), 970 (970A, 800Hp), 1250 (1250A, 1000Hp)
c = F (NEMA Type 4/12 (IP65) or N (Open)
d = Open Type:
B (200-460VAC, 3Ø), C (200-575VAC, 3Ø), Z (230-690VAC, 3Ø)
Non-Combination Type:
H (200-208VAC, 3Ø), A (230VAC, 3Ø), B (400-460VAC, 3Ø)
f = blank (standard), B (Pump Control), D (Braking Control)
g = Non Combination Type only:
8L (Line-mounted Protective Module)
8M (Load-mounted Protective Module)
8B (Line- and Load-Mounted Protective Module)
Combination SMC Flex Control Module, ratings at 460VAC, 24V Control
Voltage
a = 2 (Solid-State Controller with Fusible Disconnect)
3 (Solid-State Controller with Circuit Breaker)
bbb = 5 (5A, 3Hp), 25 (25A, 15Hp), 43 (43A, 30 Hp), 60 (60A, 40Hp), 85
(85A, 60Hp),
108 (108A, 75Hp), 135 (135A, 100Hp), 201 (201A, 150 Hp), 251
(251A, 200Hp,
317 (317A, 250Hp), 361 (361A, 300Hp), 480 (480A, 400Hp), 625
(625A,500Hp),
780 (780A, 600Hp)
c = F (NEMA Type 4/12 (IP65)
d = HD (200-208VAC, 3Ø), AD (230VAC, 3Ø),
BD (400-460VAC, 3Ø), CD (500-575VAC, 3Ø)
e = blank (standard), B (Pump Control), D (Braking Control)
f = 33 (0.5 Hp), 34 (0.75Hp), 35 (1Hp), 36, (1.5Hp), 37 (2Hp), 38 (3Hp),
39 (5Hp),
40 (7.5Hp), 41 (10Hp), 42 (15Hp), 43 (20Hp), 44 (25Hp), 45 (30Hp),
46 (40Hp)
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 141 of 143
47 (50Hp), 48 (60Hp), 49 (75Hp), 50 (100Hp), 51 (125Hp), 52
(150Hp),
54 (200Hp), 56 (250Hp), 57 (300Hp), 58 (350Hp), 59 (400Hp), 60
(450Hp),
61 (500Hp), 62 (600Hp), 63 (700Hp), 65 (800Hp), 67 (1000Hp)
g = 8L (Line-mounted Protective Module)
8M (Load-mounted Protective Module)
8B (Line- and Load-Mounted Protective Module)
Drives/ Inverters
22B-Dxx1x4
22-COMM-a
22-HIM-a
PowerFlex 70
PowerFlex 700
PowerFlex 40 (480Vac), 1.4A – 24A (0.5HP-15HP)
PowerFlex 40 communication adapters
a = D (DeviceNet), E (EtherNet/IP), P (Profibus)
PowerFlex 40 Human Interface Modules
a = A3 (Full Numeric LCD, IP20),
C2S (Panel Mount LCD, IP66),
B1 (Bezel Kit, Panel Mount LCD, IP20)
20AD-xxxAYxxNxN
20BDxxxxxxxx
PowerFlex 70 (480Vac), 1.1A
– 65A (0.5HP - 50HP)
PowerFlex 700 (480Vac)
21BDxxxxxxxx
20DDxxxxxxxx
PowerFlex 700 Packaged
Drives
PowerFlex 700S (480Vac)
9306-4EXP02ENE
Drives Explorer (Software)
WIN95,98,NT,2000,XP
20COMME
PowerFlex 70, 700, 700S,
700L EthernetI/P
Communication Module
PowerFlex 70, 700, 700S,
700L Profibus
Communication Module
PowerFlex 70, 700, 700S,
700L Human Interface
Module
20COMMP
a = A2 (Digital Speed LCD,
IP20),
A3 (Full Numeric LCD,
IP20),
A5 (Programmer only
LCD, IP20),
B1 (Bezel Kit, Panel
Mount LCD, IP20),
C3S (Full Numeric, Panel
Mount LCD, IP66),
CM201 - bcdefghij
20-HIM-a
C5S (Programmer Only,
Panel Mount LCD, IP66)
1321-3Txxxx-BB
1321-3Rxxxx-B,C,D
Isolation Transformer
(460Vac)
Line Reactor (480Vac)
CM201 Family Motors - Vector Duty Enclosed, Small AC Motor
b = Enclosure
c = Horsepower
d = Base Speed
e = Voltage (For Powertrain applications: 380, 460, 575)
f = Efficiency
g = CT or VT required
h = Mounting
I = Final Descriptor
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 142 of 143
CM202 - bcdefghij
CM203 - bcdefghij
j = Version
CM202 Family Motors - Vector Duty Enclosed, Small AC Motor
b = Enclosure
c = Horsepower
d = Base Speed
e = Voltage (For Powertrain applications: 380, 460, 575)
f = Efficiency
g = CT or VT required
h = Mounting
I = Final Descriptor
j = Version
CM203 Family Motors - Vector Duty Enclosed, Small AC Motor
b = Enclosure
c = Horsepower
d = Base Speed
e = Voltage (For Powertrain applications: 380, 460, 575)
f = Efficiency
g = CT or VT required
h = Mounting
I = Final Descriptor
j = Version
File Name: Project Book Components Rockwell 140404 V1.4(R5).doc
Version: 1.4
Original Date: 01-October-2010
Revised Date: 04-April-2014
Page 143 of 143
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement